SIMATIC Ident Code Reader Systems SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions Edition 04/2013 Answers for industry. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC Ident Code Reader Systems SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions 1 ___________________ Introduction 2 ___________________ Safety notices 3 ___________________ Description 4 ___________________ Image processing Network and system ___________________ 5 interfacing ___________________ 6 Installation ___________________ 7 Connecting ___________________ 8 Commissioning Operator control and ___________________ 9 monitoring 10 ___________ Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) Alarm, fault and system messages ___________________ 11 ___________________ 12 Service and maintenance ___________________ 13 Technical data ___________________ 14 Dimension drawings Components of the ___________________ 15 product/spares/accessories ___________________ A Appendix ___________________ B ESD guidelines List of abbreviations and ___________________ C acronyms This document is part of the documentation package with order number 6GF3440-8FA 04/2013 A5E02371045-06 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY A5E02371045-06 04/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2009 - 2013. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9 2 Safety notices .......................................................................................................................................... 13 3 Description............................................................................................................................................... 15 4 3.1 Area of application .......................................................................................................................15 3.2 Product characteristics.................................................................................................................17 3.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420....................................................................................................20 3.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440....................................................................................................21 3.5 Structure of the nameplate...........................................................................................................22 3.6 System components ....................................................................................................................23 3.7 System requirements ...................................................................................................................24 3.8 Functional description ..................................................................................................................25 Image processing .................................................................................................................................... 27 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.1.1 4.1.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2 4.1.2.3 4.1.2.4 4.1.2.5 4.1.2.6 4.1.3 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) ...............................................................................................27 Area of application and sample applications ...............................................................................27 Applications for two-dimensional codes.......................................................................................28 Applications for one-dimensional codes ......................................................................................30 Performance characteristics when reading codes .......................................................................32 Characteristics when reading ambitious data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "IDGenius" recognition......................................................................................................................32 Performance characteristics when reading qualitatively good data matrix codes .......................34 Performance characteristics when reading QR codes ................................................................35 Performance characteristics when reading PDF417 codes.........................................................36 Performance characteristics when reading DotCodes ................................................................37 Performance characteristics when reading one-dimensional codes ...........................................38 Reading multiple codes in the image...........................................................................................40 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.3 4.2.3.4 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 4.2.4.5 4.2.4.6 Code verification ..........................................................................................................................42 Overview ......................................................................................................................................42 Grading ........................................................................................................................................44 Verification methods for different application scenarios ..............................................................45 Verification of printed labels.........................................................................................................45 Verification of direct part marks ...................................................................................................45 Examples of defects in the marking quality .................................................................................47 Verification standards supported .................................................................................................48 Data matrix verification ................................................................................................................50 Siemens DPM ..............................................................................................................................50 ISO/IEC 16022 .............................................................................................................................52 ISO/IEC 15415 .............................................................................................................................53 AS9132 Rev. A.............................................................................................................................55 AIM DPM-1-2006 .........................................................................................................................57 Graphical support for analysis of verification errors.....................................................................59 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 3 Table of contents 5 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.6.1 4.2.6.2 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.8.1 4.2.8.2 4.2.8.3 4.2.8.4 4.2.8.5 4.2.8.6 4.2.8.7 4.2.8.8 Barcode verification..................................................................................................................... 60 Calibration and activating verification ......................................................................................... 62 Normalizing the reader................................................................................................................ 63 Calibrating the reflectance .......................................................................................................... 64 Formatted output of the verification ............................................................................................ 65 Verification result......................................................................................................................... 67 Standard report for Siemens DPM.............................................................................................. 68 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022............................................................................................. 69 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415............................................................................................. 70 Standard report for AS9132, Rev A ............................................................................................ 71 Standard Report for AIM DPM-1-2006........................................................................................ 72 Standard report for the "ID-Genius" decoder .............................................................................. 72 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416............................................................................................. 73 Standard report for OCR and OCV ............................................................................................. 74 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) ................................................................................................................................ 75 Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus............................................................................................. 75 Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition ...................................................... 75 Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition .............................................. 77 Supervised training ..................................................................................................................... 78 Examples of plain text applications:............................................................................................ 78 Quality characteristics in optical character recognition............................................................... 84 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.5.1 4.4.5.2 Options for image acquisition and image processing ................................................................. 85 "Single trigger" image acquisition option..................................................................................... 86 "Auto trigger" image acquisition option ....................................................................................... 88 "Scan" image acquisition option.................................................................................................. 91 Image acquisition in program sequence mode ........................................................................... 92 Match options for Track&Trace tasks ......................................................................................... 93 Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command) ............................................................... 93 Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match) .................................................................... 96 Network and system interfacing............................................................................................................... 99 5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 99 5.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile ............................. 100 5.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile ...................................... 101 5.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile...................... 102 5.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface..................................................................................... 104 5.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface ................................................................................... 105 5.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module ................................. 107 5.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger........................................................................... 108 5.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible ................................................................................. 109 5.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser ...................................................................... 110 5.11 System setup reader and external lamp ................................................................................... 111 5.12 Other system extensions........................................................................................................... 112 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 4 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Table of contents 6 7 8 9 10 Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 113 6.1 Important notes on installation ...................................................................................................113 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440.............................................................................114 Connecting ............................................................................................................................................ 119 7.1 Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference ............................................................119 7.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) ........................................................................................................120 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 Connecting components ............................................................................................................121 Wiring example ..........................................................................................................................127 Operating the reader with external lighting ................................................................................129 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................... 131 8.1 Prerequisites ..............................................................................................................................131 8.2 Notes on installation...................................................................................................................132 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface....................................133 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 Transferring optional licenses ....................................................................................................142 Installing a license......................................................................................................................142 Removing a license....................................................................................................................152 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives ..............................................................................................153 Operator control and monitoring ............................................................................................................ 157 9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................157 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.5.1 9.2.5.2 9.2.5.3 9.2.6 9.2.6.1 9.2.6.2 9.2.7 9.2.8 9.2.9 9.2.10 9.2.11 Working with the user interface..................................................................................................158 Structure of the user interface....................................................................................................158 Adjustment - Adjust image .........................................................................................................164 Adjustment - Save program .......................................................................................................168 Connections ...............................................................................................................................171 Programs....................................................................................................................................177 Graphical user interface elements .............................................................................................178 Image acquisition and decoder program steps..........................................................................181 OCR program steps ...................................................................................................................187 Libraries and library tabs............................................................................................................193 Verification library ......................................................................................................................193 Character font library .................................................................................................................198 Run.............................................................................................................................................204 Options.......................................................................................................................................207 Info .............................................................................................................................................213 Manage ......................................................................................................................................218 Stop............................................................................................................................................221 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages .......................................................................................................223 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)...................................................................... 233 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO .....................................................................................234 Configuration for using the Ident profile.....................................................................................237 Configuration for using the FB 79 ..............................................................................................238 Concept of device replacement .................................................................................................239 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 5 Table of contents 10.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) .......................................................................... 240 10.3 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.3.1 10.3.3.2 10.3.3.3 10.3.3.4 10.3.3.5 10.3.3.6 10.3.3.7 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile.......................................................................................... 241 Setting parameters of FB45 ...................................................................................................... 241 Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile) ................................................................ 243 Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile.............................................................. 245 Status displays of the MV reader .............................................................................................. 245 Initialization ............................................................................................................................... 247 WRITE commands/MV command interface.............................................................................. 248 READ commands...................................................................................................................... 260 Result evaluation of a command............................................................................................... 264 Preconditions for the commands .............................................................................................. 265 Group errors.............................................................................................................................. 267 10.4 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.4.1 Control with FB79...................................................................................................................... 269 Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO........................................................... 270 Sample program for data exchange when code length <= 27 bytes ........................................ 275 Programming data fragmentation ............................................................................................. 277 Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL"................................................................................. 279 Error information of FB79.......................................................................................................... 292 10.5 10.5.1 10.5.2 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO"......................................................................................... 294 Control signals .......................................................................................................................... 294 Selecting modes........................................................................................................................ 295 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 10.6.3 10.6.4 10.6.5 10.6.6 10.6.7 10.6.8 10.6.9 10.6.10 10.6.11 10.6.12 10.6.13 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 ................................................................................................ 301 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 301 Trigger ....................................................................................................................................... 302 Write match string ..................................................................................................................... 303 Set DISA bit............................................................................................................................... 304 Reset DISA bit........................................................................................................................... 304 Query status.............................................................................................................................. 305 Select program number............................................................................................................. 306 Save program with internal trigger ............................................................................................ 307 Save program with external trigger ........................................................................................... 308 Reset command ........................................................................................................................ 309 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH)........................................................... 310 XMATCH user data (without header)........................................................................................ 311 Set digital out ............................................................................................................................ 316 10.7 10.7.1 10.7.2 Scanner portal application......................................................................................................... 318 Configuration............................................................................................................................. 319 Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader................................................... 323 10.8 10.8.1 10.8.1.1 10.8.1.2 Remote client ............................................................................................................................ 324 XML backup and XML restore .................................................................................................. 324 XML backup .............................................................................................................................. 325 XML restore............................................................................................................................... 327 10.9 10.9.1 10.9.2 10.9.3 Sample programs...................................................................................................................... 330 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 330 Example 1: Program for interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 ........... 330 Example 2: Program for archiving diagnostic information on a PC/PG .................................... 332 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 6 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Table of contents 11 12 Alarm, fault and system messages ........................................................................................................ 333 11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................333 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 Reporting diagnostics information..............................................................................................333 Error messages..........................................................................................................................334 Warnings and notes ...................................................................................................................339 Read results ...............................................................................................................................341 Read and verification error messages .......................................................................................342 Filter error messages .................................................................................................................344 Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) ........................345 11.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs...................................346 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 I/O device diagnostics................................................................................................................347 Introduction ................................................................................................................................347 Reading out diagnostics information with S7.............................................................................347 Diagnostics with PROFINET IO .................................................................................................348 Service and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 351 12.1 13 Maintenance and repair .............................................................................................................351 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 353 13.1 General technical specifications ................................................................................................353 13.2 Technical specifications of the reader .......................................................................................356 13.3 Technical specifications of the interfaces ..................................................................................359 14 Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................................. 361 15 Components of the product/spares/accessories .................................................................................... 367 15.1 Readers......................................................................................................................................367 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.1.1 15.2.1.2 15.2.1.3 15.2.2 15.2.2.1 15.2.2.2 15.2.2.3 15.2.2.4 15.2.2.5 15.2.3 15.2.3.1 15.2.3.2 15.2.3.3 15.2.3.4 15.2.3.5 15.2.3.6 15.2.3.7 15.2.3.8 Accessories................................................................................................................................370 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440..........................................................................................370 Further accessories ...................................................................................................................370 External lighting units.................................................................................................................371 SIMATIC MV440 and MV420 documentation package .............................................................372 SIMATIC MV420 ........................................................................................................................374 Fittings for mounting ..................................................................................................................374 Reader lens................................................................................................................................374 Protective tube ...........................................................................................................................376 Built-in ring light .........................................................................................................................377 Cables ........................................................................................................................................377 SIMATIC MV440 ........................................................................................................................380 Fittings for mounting ..................................................................................................................380 Reader lens................................................................................................................................380 Protective lens cover..................................................................................................................387 Built-in ring light .........................................................................................................................390 Licenses .....................................................................................................................................391 Calibration card ..........................................................................................................................391 PoE switch .................................................................................................................................392 Cables ........................................................................................................................................392 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 7 Table of contents A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 397 A.1 Service & Support ..................................................................................................................... 397 A.2 Directives and declarations ....................................................................................................... 399 B ESD guidelines ...................................................................................................................................... 401 C List of abbreviations and acronyms........................................................................................................ 403 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 407 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 417 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 8 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 1 Introduction Scope Applies to devices/licenses with the following order numbers Order number Device/license 6GF3420-0AA20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B 6GF3420-0AX20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Body 6GF3420-0AA40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P 6GF3420-0AX40 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P Body 6GF3440-1CD10 SIMATIC MV440 SR 6GF3440-1GE10 SIMATIC MV440 HR 6GF3440-1LE10 SIMATIC MV440 UR 6GF3400-0SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license 6GF3400-0SL02 SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license 6GF3400-1SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus license Security messages Note For its automation and drives product portfolio, Siemens provides IT security mechanisms to support secure operation of the plant/machine. Our products are continuously being further developed also taking into account the aspect of IT security. We therefore recommend that you regularly check for updates of our products and that you only use the latest versions. You will find information on this in: Industrial Security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity) Here, you can register for a product-specific newsletter. For the secure operation of a plant/machine, it is also necessary to integrate the automation components in a full IT security concept for the entire plant/machine that represents the state of the art in IT technology. You will find information on this in: Industry Online Support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/llisapi.dll?func=cslib.csinfo2&aktprim=99&lang=en) Products from other manufacturers that are being used must also be taken into account. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 9 Introduction Purpose of this documentation These instructions contain all the information you need for commissioning and using the device. It is intended both for persons installing the device mechnically, connecting it electronically, configuring the parameters and commissioning it as well as service and maintenance engineers. Note * Read the operating instructions before starting to work with this device. The operating instructions contain all the important information about the device. * Noting and acting on this information: - Ensures the device functions correctly - Saves you service costs Screenshots in the Operating Instructions The screenshots shown in these Operating Instructions are based on the user interface display of SIMATIC MV440. Many parts of the user interface of SIMATIC MV420 are the same as those in SIMATIC MV440. Any functional differences are pointed out in the description. History This history establishes the correlation between the current documentation and the valid firmware of the device. The documentation of this edition is applicable for the following firmware: Edition Firmware Remark 01 03/2009 V1.0.0 First edition (SIMATIC MV440 only) 02 12/2009 V2.1.0 Editorial revision as regards content. 03 04/2010 V3.0 Editorial revision as regards content. Integration of new functions * Optical character recognition (OCR) option for all SIMATIC MV440 readers * User interface starts in seconds * Advanced control commands for control via RS232/TCP SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 10 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Introduction Edition Firmware Remark 04 04/2011 V4.0 Editorial revision as regards content. Adjustment for new hardware * Ultra-high resolution for SIMATIC MV440 * Power over Ethernet (PoE) for SIMATIC MV440 * Veri-Genius license * New ring lights for SIMATIC MV440 * IP67 protective lens cover Integration of new functions, including 05 09/2012 V5.0 * Support for Track&Trace applications * Expanded image sequence evaluation * Extended diagnostics logs * Remote control of the digital outputs of the reader * Configuration via remote client * Verification according to the AIM DPM-1-2006 standard * Support for scanner portal applications * User administration with expanded access protection * License management Editorial revision as regards content. Adjustment for new hardware * SIMATIC MV420 SR B/P BODY * MV420 built-in IR ring light * 16 mm MV420 lens kit * 6 mm MV420 lens kit * MV440 green built-in ring light * MV420 red built-in ring light * MV440 metal/PMMA lens cover * Text-Genius Plus license Integration of new functions, including 06 04/2013 V5.1 * High-performance optical character recognition with the TextGenius Plus license * A modern, user-friendly user interface * Multicode compatibility for scan mode and autotrigger Editorial revision as regards content. Integration of new functions, including * DotCode decoder * Results preview * Open Web API interface * TIA integration with Ident profile without communication module * Control with FB 45 and Ident profile: Initialization with program selection possible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 11 Introduction Convention Within this documentation, the term reader is also used instead of the product name SIMATIC MV420 or SIMATIC MV440. Information We would point out that the contents of this product documentation shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. The Purchase Agreement contains the complete and exclusive obligations of Siemens AG. Any statements contained in this documentation do not create new warranties or restrict the existing warranty. The content reflects the technical position at the time of printing. Subject to technical change as a result of further development. Contacts worldwide If you require further information or if unexpected problems occur, you can request the required information from your contact. You will find details of your local contact on the Internet. Product information on the Internet The manual is part of the CD that can be ordered or ships with the product. The manual is also available on the Internet on the Siemens home page. Environmental protection Devices described in this programming manual can be recycled owing to the low content of noxious substances in their version. Please contact a certified waste disposal company for eco-friendly recycling and to dispose of your old devices. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 12 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Safety notices 2 This device conforms to the pertinent safety regulations according to IEC, VDE and EN. If you have doubts regarding the installation of the device in the planned environment, please get in touch with our service contact. Qualified personnel Startup and operation of the device/system in question must only be performed using this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as referred to in the safety guidelines in this documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Proper use The unit may be used only for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in combination with the equipment, components and devices of other manufacturers where recommended or permitted by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Repairs Repairs to the device may only be performed by authorized specialists. WARNING Risk of injury/material damage Unauthorized opening or improperly performed repairs can cause considerable damage to property or danger to users. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 13 Safety notices System expansions Install only system expansions that are intended for this device. Installing other expansions can damage the system or violate the safety provisions and regulations for radio interference suppression. You can obtain information on system expansions suitable for installation from the technical customer service or from the sales office responsible for your area. NOTICE Invalidation of the warranty Any damage to the device caused by installing or replacing system expansion products will void the warranty. NOTICE Voltage can destroy electrostatic-sensitive modules The device contains modules that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Modules that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge can be destroyed by voltages well below those that can be perceived by human beings. Such voltages occur if you touch a component or electrical connectors of a module without first discharging the static from your body. The damage caused by overvoltage on a module cannot normally be detected immediately and only becomes apparent after a longer period of operation. Measures for protecting against discharge of static electricity: * Before working with modules, make sure that you discharge static from your body, for example by touching a grounded object. * The devices and tools used must also be free of static charges. * Disconnect the power supply. * Hold modules only by their edges and do not touch any connector pins or conductors. Connecting the 24 V DC power supply WARNING The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (in accordance with UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required. 24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V) The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according (floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 14 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.1 3 Area of application The SIMATIC MV400 family of readers are optical code readers designed specifically for the recognition and evaluation of numerous machine-readable codes and plain text in industrial production. The list of readable codes includes all common matrix and barcodes that can usually be detected reliably regardless of the print technique or the carrier medium used. In the SIMATIC MV400 device family, particular emphasis was placed on: Ruggedness Reliability Ease of operation This applies both to the mechanical properties and the high-quality image processing functions of all devices in the SIMATIC MV400 product family. SIMATIC MV440 can also verify the code quality of codes according to commonly applied standards. The reader calculates the quality of applied codes and therefore allows quality control of the marking process. Key functions of the reader The main functions of the reader are reading codes and grading the code quality. The area of application of the SIMATIC MV400 product family covers practically all areas of industrial production. Potential uses range from recognition of stationary parts to fast moving parts on conveyor systems. Available versions SIMATIC MV420 SIMATIC MV420 is available with an integrated lens and lighting. SIMATIC MV420 has an ingress protection rating of IP67. SIMATIC MV420 is available in parts (base unit, ring light, lens). SIMATIC MV440 High-performance integrated lighting is available for SIMATIC MV440. The device can be adjusted for nearly all read distances and code sizes with a C/CS mount lens. IP67 is also possible for this version with the lens cover. SIMATIC MV440 is also available in 3 different resolutions. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 15 Description 3.1 Area of application Industrial applications The readers are therefore suitable for all industrial applications where direct marking (Direct Part Marking - DPM), tracking and serialization of production parts are used. This applies equally to production processes and logistics processes. Communication Interfaces The readers have all the common communications interfaces of industrial sensors and can therefore be connected to a wide variety of systems. The MOBY-ASM interface allows seamless combination with the RFID industrial standard MOBY and means that many communications modules available in the MOBY system (ASMs) can be used, for example for PROFIBUS. Simple operation and commissioning Despite the wide range of possible applications, a main feature of the readers is their ease of operation and commissioning. For most applications, the parameters are set automatically. If, however, readjustment becomes necessary, the parameters can be assigned using the integrated Web server and an Internet browser without prior software installation. As of release 04/2011, all SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be suppled by Power over Ethernet (PoE) which further simplifies installation. The Text-Genius license is available for SIMATIC MV440 readers as of release 09/2012. This provides a reliable read function not just for standard plain text, but also for customerspecific fonts. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 16 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.2 Product characteristics 3.2 Product characteristics The reader is a compact code reader for industrial applications with the following product characteristics. Reading code For codes with maximum quality, the read reliability for data matrix code is 99.999 % (compare quality grading). Reading speed: - Max. of 80 reads per second (Rps) in SIMATIC MV440 SR - Max. of 70 Rps (SIMATIC MV420 SR-P) SIMATIC MV440 only: Variable read distance thanks to exchangeable lenses (typically: 100 mm to 3000 mm) Object speed up to 10 m/s Code sizes (example: DMC) from 1 mm2 to 200 mm Autotrigger and scan mode (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Up to 15 parameter sets and code reading settings can be stored and selected (up to 5 with SIMATIC MV420 SR-B). Up to 150 codes can be read per image acquisition (SIMATIC MV440 UR) Reading plain text (OCR) with a Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440 only) High-performance optical character recognition (OCR) is available for all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of firmware version V3.0. The license can be ordered under the order number 6GF3400-0SL01. Flexible reading of numerous fonts without time-consuming training Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute) Plain text and up to 50 machine codes (SIMATIC MV440 UR: 150) read simultaneously Automatic text localization Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines) Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels Up to 12 image regions can be read with independent settings. Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text Numerous filter and comparison functions SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 17 Description 3.2 Product characteristics Reading plain text with a Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV440 only) Read tasks and functions above and beyond reading plain text with Text-Genius: Can be adapted to customer-specific fonts Optimizes distinction of ambiguous characters by saving character styles. Measuring code quality with the Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC-MV440 only) ISO/IEC 16022:2000 AIM Specification With Veri-Genius license (order number 6GF3400-0SL02): ISO/IEC 15415:2004 DMC AS9132 Rev A, 2005 DMC - previously IAQG AIM DPM-1-2006 ISO/IEC 15416:2000 BC - ANSI X3.182-1990 Siemens DPM Integrated communications interfaces Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for TCP/IP and PROFINET IO 1 trigger input and 1 flash output SIMATIC MV420 - MOBY-ASM or RS-232 with TxD and RxD - 2 customizable digital outputs SIMATIC MV440 - MOBY-ASM - RS-232 with TXD and RXD - 4 cutomizable digital I/Os Advanced communication via MOBY-ASM With ASM 456 communications module for PROFIBUS DP/V1 With RF180C communications module for PROFINET With other Moby communications modules Power over Ethernet The following applies to all SIMATIC MV440 readers as of release 04/2011. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 18 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.2 Product characteristics Robust construction, suitable for industry Class of protection IP67 Optical system New in release 9/2012: HD lens with 16 mm field of vision now available in addition to the 6 mm standard lens for extremely small codes and large read distances. SIMATIC MV420 - Integrated continuously adjustable optic for different read distances SIMATIC MV440 - Lens can be selected - C/CS-mount lenses Lighting With internal lamp With external lamp User interface No installation needed - via Internet Explorer Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode Versatile HTML pages for monitoring the reader, for example in WinCC flexible. Extensive operator control and monitoring functions, even in processing mode Wide-ranging diagnostics and logging functions: - Error image memory - Event logging Firmware update System backup SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 19 Description 3.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 3.3 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 The image below shows the SIMATIC MV420 reader. Swivel lens and lamp protection Nameplate Ethernet socket LED displays for operating mode Housing SIMATIC MV420 Internal lamp Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS232/MOBY-ASM Figure 3-1 Design of the SIMATIC MV420 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 20 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 3.4 Design of the SIMATIC MV440 The image below shows the SIMATIC MV440 reader. LED display for operating mode Protective lens cover 65 Nameplate Ethernet socket (PoE) Figure 3-2 ASM female connector Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS-232 Housing SIMATIC MV440 Internal lamp Design of the SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 21 Description 3.5 Structure of the nameplate 3.5 Structure of the nameplate The nameplate of the reader with the order number is located on the housing and shows the order number and other important product information. s Made in Germany SIMATIC MV440 XX DC 24V 270mA PoE 48V 135mA NEC Class 2 SIMATIC MV440 XX 6GF3440-ABCDE IP67 SVPJM123456 Siemens AG, Industry Sector MAC-ADRESSE Ta: 0C...50C X Nameplate right Manufacturer Warning symbol Product designation C-Tick mark CE mark Nameplate left Data matrix code IP rating Product designation with order number and manufacturer code/serial number MAC address, 12-character Product version of the device KC symbol Figure 3-3 Example of the SIMATIC MV440 nameplate Note A second MAC address is also reserved when the device supplied. This MAC address is the MAC address on the nameplate + 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 22 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.6 System components 3.6 System components The following schematic shows a typical system structure with a SIMATIC MV440 reader. 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK 8VHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP b9b'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86'3 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUV\VWHP &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 3-4 Example of a typical system configuration with conveyor system (illustration showing SIMATIC MV440) Note While the SIMATIC MV440 has a separate ASM socket (middle socket in the figure), on the SIMATIC MV420 the ASM interface function is integrated in the power IO RS-232 socket. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 23 Description 3.7 System requirements 3.7 System requirements Reader To equip an application with the SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers, you require the following hardware components: SIMATIC MV420 or SIMATIC MV440 basic unit Lens suitable for the code size and read distance (only for SIMATIC MV440) LED ring light integrated in the lens protector or external, for example lighting unit for the SIMATIC Vision Sensors (only for SIMATIC MV440) Power supply 24 V DC, 2 A (tolerance: 19.2 ... 28.8 V). - As an alternative over I/O cable or ASM cable - Alternatively over Power Over Ethernet (SIMATIC MV440 and SIMATIC Body variants only) Alternative communications connection over: - RS232 integrated in the I/O cable - ASM cable - Ethernet cable Note If you use a reader in conjunction with a Moby communication module, the power supply is via the ASM interface. For the SIMATIC MV420, you require a special ASM cable, order no. 6GT34200AC00-2CB0. Refer to the chapter "Cables" (Page 370). PC/programming device Apart from the components for operating the reader, you also require a PC/programming device (PG) to commission the device: PC / PG with at least the following configuration: - Ethernet interface with at least 100 Mbps Software: - Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP1 or higher - Internet Explorer V6.0 as of SP1 or higher. Recommended: Internet Explorer V8 or higher. - Java Runtime Environment, see java homepage (http://www.java.com). Recommended: Java Runtime Environment 1.7.x. The system requirements of SIMATIC MV400 readers for communication partners in the process depend on the selected communication connection described in Network and system interfacing (Page 99). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 24 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Description 3.8 Functional description 3.8 Functional description Image acquisition The readers capture the code to be read using digital image acquisition. Following image acquisition, the image is analyzed by a powerful digital signal processor. Multistage complex algorithms are used in the analysis: To find the codes contained in the image. To decode the code. To verify the code. To find and read the plain text in the image. The results of the evaluation are transferred to an automation system connected via the communications interfaces. When working with the reader, the user is supported because the parameter settings for the image acquisition and decoding software are made by the device. Once the reader has been mounted, aligned and focused, reading is performed regardless of the orientation for one or more codes in the image. User interface The user interface is based on Web server technology. This means that only a computer with an Internet browser connected via Ethernet is necessary. The reader is then called using its IP address. The display of the user interface appears in the display window of the Internet browser. Display via Ethernet allows convenient setting and control of all parameters of the reader. Operator control of the code reader is supported by context-sensitive online help. If the automatic settings do not produce an ideal result due to special conditions, you can readjust individual parameters of the reader using the user interface. You can store 15 different settings on the reader. All the settings for communication with other devices must be performed in the user interface. Reading code The actual reading is triggered by different events. In the simplest situation, the code reader generates the trigger event itself. The this end, the readers have an autotrigger function. Depending on the application, it may be advisable to provide the trigger event via the I/O cable. In this case, the code reader obtains the signal, for example from a light barrier. The trigger signal immediately triggers image acquisition followed by evaluation. The result of the evaluation is then transferred to the higher-level control system via the selected communications connection. Once the evaluation result has been transferred, reading can be started again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 25 Description 3.8 Functional description Optical Character Recognition (OCR) The high-performance character recognition algorithm is an optional add-on to code reading, by which plain text is read by the camera. The reading of plain text can be combined with the reading of 1-D and 2-D codes. In order to filter out incorrectly labeled products, a comparison can also be made with a predefined text. When reading plain text, a minimum quality can be specified. The high-performance character recognition can also be performed at very high clock rates of up to 1 000 reads per minute (for example, with 10 characters per read). Customer-specific fonts can be saved on the reader (requires Text-Genius Plus license). User management and access protection The functions of the reader can be protected from unauthorized access and manipulation. The access rights can be assigned to various personified users in the form of user roles. Configuration via remote client The configuration of the reader can be backed up and restored automatically using a connected PC, for example when there is a shift change. This means the validation of your production plant can be restored at the press of a button. Track&Trace support With comprehensive match options and remote commands, badly marked parts can be reliably ejected with the aid of the integrated digital outputs. This also applies to applications with high parts rates and speeds. Scanner portal support If the ultra-high resolution of the SIMATIC MV440 UR reader means that the large field of view is not adequate for covering a transport path in a given application, multiple SIMATIC MV400 readers can be configured as the portal if the large is not enough The readers synchronize with each other. The master reader transfers the read result of the portal to the higher-level controller. Diagnostics functions The reader has a wide range of diagnostics functions. If incorrect readings are made, the diagnostics functions can be used to find reasons for the errors based on the recorded pictures. This is, for example, necessary when problems occurred in the prior marking process. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 26 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.1 Area of application and sample applications 4 The reader reads the types of code listed below. Two-dimensional codes DMC PDF417 QR DotCode VeriCode (requires additional license) One-dimensional codes Codabar Code 32 Code 39 (without checksum) Code 39+CS (with checksum) Code 93 Code 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 GS1 Databar Expanded GS1 Databar Limited GS1 Databar Omnidirectional GS1 Databar Stacked Int. 2/5 (without checksum) Int. 2/5+CS (with checksum) Pharmacode Postnet UPC-A UPC-E SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 27 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.1.1 Applications for two-dimensional codes Below, you will find several examples of data matrix codes, QR codes, PDF417 codes, VeriCodes and DotCodes: Printed code Laser code (plastic surface) Laser code (pcb) Code created with an ink jet printer. Punched code Data Matrix ECC080 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 28 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Data Matrix ECC100 Data Matrix ECC140 Printed QR code Printed PDF417 code VeriCode DotCodes SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 29 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.1.2 Applications for one-dimensional codes Codabar Code 32 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 EAN 8 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 30 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) EAN 13 Interleaved 2/5 GS1 Databar Expanded GS1 Databar Limited GS1 Databar Omnidirectional GS1 Databar Stacked SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 31 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Postnet Pharmacode UPC A UPC E 4.1.2 Performance characteristics when reading codes 4.1.2.1 Characteristics when reading ambitious data matrix codes and VeriCodes with "IDGenius" recognition Note ID-Genius not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B readers The ID-Genius recognition method is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B readers. Note VeriCode support only with activated VeriCode(R) license VeriCode is only supported by readers with an activated VeriCode(R) license. The license can be activated by entering a license key in the adjustment support. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 32 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Note Changing the time-saving image acquisition with half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The self-adaptive recognition technique of the reader "ID-Genius" allows reliable and robust reading of the most difficult codes. The most reliable recognition is reached by the reader when you make adequate time available for the device to adapt itself by setting a high cycle time limit. Range of application Any alignment and position of the code in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Reading codes even when cells overlap or are largely isolated. Reading of mirror-inverted codes. Tolerance of distortion due, for example, to inclined installation of the image sensor (viewing angle down to a lower limit of approximately 40 degrees to the printed surface). Resistant to similar-looking foreign objects in the area of the code. Resistant to interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code Wide tolerance of contrast fluctuations. Wide range of imaging sizes from 5 to 35 pixels per cell. Light shadows or shiny areas in cells are tolerated. The polarity of the cells compared with the background must not, however, become inverted within a code. The ratio of the distance to the closest neighbor and the diameter of any cell can be between 2 and 0.8. Although code dots must be printed according to a regular square grid pattern, individual points can be displaced from their ideal position by up to 1/3 of the grid unit. Even slight parallelogram-shaped distortions during printing are tolerated. With large-image but small-dimensioned codes, slight curves in the printed material surface are tolerated. With larger dimension codes (for example, more than 14 x 14) or a strongly inclined sensor axis, curves are not allowed. Large tolerance of background disturbances that cannot be described quantitatively Large tolerance of poor contrast conditions The reader reads codes with a maximum code dimension of 72 x 72 cells. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 33 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.2.2 Performance characteristics when reading qualitatively good data matrix codes Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition with half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The "standard" recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed data matrix codes of good quality. Range of application In this mode, the read rates achieved are higher than those when reading complex codes. The range of image sizes is from 1.5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static. The cells do not overlap or only slightly, nor are the majority isolated. The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle. There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code. There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code. Fluctuations in contrast are slight. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 34 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.2.3 Performance characteristics when reading QR codes Note Maximum code dimension/unsupported code types * Codes with a maximum code dimension of 89 x 89 can be read. * The following code types are not supported: Micro QR code, Macro QR code. Note Changing the time-saving image acquisition with half resolution If the cells are larger than 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed QR codes of good quality. Range of application The range of imaging sizes ranges from 5 to 35 pixels per cell. The range is static. The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. The viewing angle of the reader to the surface can be between 70 and 90. The diameter of the cells must be uniform over the entire code field. The contrast between cells and the background must be approximately the same over the entire code field. The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture such as stripes. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 35 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.2.4 Performance characteristics when reading PDF417 codes Note Unsupported code types The following code types are not supported: Truncated PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417. Note Changing the time-saving image acquisition with half resolution With bar widths > 6 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed PDF417 codes of good quality. Range of application The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Codes with a bar width 3 pixels and in which the height of a single row of symbols is 9 pixels can be read. The width of the black and white bars must be uniform over the entire code field. The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 70 and 90. The code should not make contact with any other objects in the image, you can do this, for example by keeping the quiet zone free with twice the column width. Within the code, the ratio of contrast (in other words, the difference between black and white) to noise should be at least three. This ratio must be similar over the entire code field. The image background must have a homogeneous brightness, for example no texture such as stripes. The error correction codes (in other words, the lower part of the barcode) must not be covered. At the minimum bar width, each symbol column requires 51 pixels. Along with the four start and stop patterns, the width of the code with n code columns is at least: Width = 51 * (n + 4) pixels. Due to the limited image resolution, codes can be read as follows: - with the SIMATIC MV440 SR reader up to 40 code rows and up to 6 code columns. - with the SIMATIC MV440 HR reader up to 60 code rows and up to 12 code columns. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 36 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.2.5 Performance characteristics when reading DotCodes Note Changing to time-saving image acquisition with half resolution If the cells are > 10 pixels, change to time-saving image acquisition at half resolution. This change is also useful at high object speeds. The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed DotCodes of good quality. Range of application The range of image sizes is from 4 to 40 pixels per cell. The range is static. The cells are isolated. The distortions are minimal, for example due to installation of the reader at an angle. There are no or only a few foreign objects in the area of the code. There are no interference patterns (grooves, granularity) in the area of the code. Fluctuations in contrast are slight. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 37 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.2.6 Performance characteristics when reading one-dimensional codes The recognition processes of the reader allow reliable and fast reading of printed onedimensional codes of good quality. If the code type has a checksum, the checksum is also transferred in the read result (text). Do not work with variable string lengths with "Interleaved 2/5" or "Code 39". To avoid incomplete codes being read, set the number of bars to "Saved" on the "Advanced" tab of under speedup options. The "Full ASCII" coding of the code type "Code 39" is not supported. - To read this code type with the reader, use code type "Code 39". - To obtain the original text with the additional "Full ASCII" characters, you need to postedit the textual read result. Reliable reading of Pharmacode As the Pharmacode structure is simple, set the following speedup parameters to "Saved" on the "Advanced" tab under "Options": - Height - Length - Module width - Number of bars - Minimum quiet zone length - Sample spacing Save the program before reading. For the program to be successfully saved, the Pharmacode to be saved must have both narrow and wide elements. This avoids reading errors due to the absence of error correction of this code type. Since a Pharmacode on its head cannot be detected automatically, select the code type "Pharmacode (0)" or "Pharmacode (180)". Standard code generators allow a maximum of 63 bars for a Pharmacode. The integrated Pharmacode decoder is therefore also limited to maximum of 63 bars per code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 38 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Range of application The codes can have any alignment in the image. The code can be printed both dark on a light background and light on a dark background. Codes with a height of 25 pixels and height/length ratio 0.15 are read. The viewing angle of the sensor to the surface can be between 80 and 90. The codes must not be printed on a curved surface. The quiet zone around the code must be undisturbed. Code and background must have a homogeneous brightness. The following limit values for the bar width must not be exceeded: - Code 39: 8 pixels - Code128: 12 pixels - Int. 2/5: 5 pixels - EAN 13/UPC-A/UPC-E/EAN 8: 12 pixels - Code 93: 14 pixels - Codabar: 9 pixels Range of applications for "low" codes For special applications in the printing industry, optimization is available for 1D codes with extremely low bar heights. This can be activated in the options on the "Speedup" tab. The range of applications for 1D codes (see "Range of applications") is to be limited with the following supplementary conditions: Bar height must be > 20 pixels. Bar height must be > twice the minimum bar width (1x width). The codes must be parallel to the axis (horizontal or vertical): Tolerance < 5. The print quality must be extremely good. The minimum quiet zone must be > 5.5 x the minimum bar width (1x width). See also Options (Page 207) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 39 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) 4.1.3 Reading multiple codes in the image Note Restricted availability of multicode Multicode functionality is not available for: * QR codes * DotCodes * PDF417 codes * VeriCodes Note Order of output Output is line by line starting with the code of the top left and finishing at the bottom right. If the order of the codes is required for an application (for example for writing a triggersynchronized match string), make sure that the position and rotation of the selected object remains constant during every image acquisition. In "Multicode" mode, up to 50 codes per image acquisition can be decoded. SIMATIC MV440 UR can decode up to 150 codes image acquisition. Range of application Even different code types can be read in one image. Combined operation with "TextGenius" and "Text-Genius Plus" optical character recognition (OCR) is also possible. Available for data matrix codes that can be read with standard methods. See also Performance characteristics when reading qualitatively good data matrix codes (Page 34). The maximum number of codes and the code types used are specified when the program is saved. Depending on the configuration, the actual number and the code types found in processing mode can vary. Due to the multiple decoding, the processing time is extended approximately proportional to the number of codes per image. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 40 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.1 Reading code (1D and 2D codes) Example With this function, you can record a one-dimensional code and a data matrix code on packaging with one image acquisition and output the read result of both codes in the same cycle. s 6FDODQFH 3 *.8$ 693; 6 (&$'%( 9 1 ; /,67(' $33529(' &/,',9*3$%&'7 &/,=RQH*3,,&7 7Dr&r& %3 ,7(IRU+$=/2& &/,',9*3$%&'7 &/,=RQH*3,,&7 ,,*([Q$,,7 .(0$$7(;; 0$'(,1*(50$1< Figure 4-1 Example: Reading multiple codes in the image SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 41 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2 Code verification 4.2.1 Overview Verification A generally accepted axiom in the implementation of traceability says: The data matrix code will never be better than it was at the time it left the marking device. During the marking process, verification ensures that the marking is correctly applied. Verification makes sure that corrections can be made to the marking procedure before it leaves a range of tolerance and produces unusable or incomplete markings. Marking quality To recognize and ensure the readability and quality of a marking, a verifier is required instead of a pure code reader. A simple code reader outputs the result read or not read and does not provide any data to identify trends relating to the marking device or the operator or to inform the operator of potential read errors. 0DUNLQJTXDOLW\ 1RWUHDG 1XPEHURIPDUNHGSDUWV Figure 4-2 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a reader The verifier assigns a quality grade from 4 to 0 to the readable markings. This grade informs the marking device or operator when preventive maintenance is required. Based on this knowledge, maintenance can be planned at a suitable time before the machine actually becomes defective. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 42 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 0DUNLQJTXDOLW\ 1RWUHDG 1XPEHURIPDUNHGSDUWV Figure 4-3 Sequence involved in marking quality when using a verifier It is, however, important that the measuring procedure and marking quality are suitable for the marking method used. With direct part marking (DPM), the data matrix code is applied directly to the surface of the object: In contrast to the standards of DPM verification, conventional standards can lead to incorrect alarms or to serious marking errors being overlooked. Depending on the particular requirements, there are several test standards. Data matrix codes on labels can be tested with test systems according to ISO/IEC 16022. For directly marked parts, however, a verification tailored to this purpose is necessary. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 43 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.2 Grading Quality levels The verifier reports the quality in five grades known generally as "quality levels". Older verifiers identify these grades based on a single letter A to F (without E) with F being the lowest quality level. Verifiers of the newer generations identify the value range numerically from 4 to 0 with 0 being the lowest quality level. With the verifiers of the SIMATIC MV440 series, the user can choose either of the quality grading systems. Grading The grade is shown in the user interface as a value from 4 to 0 (or A to F without E). Each quality grade is also assigned one of three evaluations. This evaluation not only allows fast visual checks of the quality using the color coding of the display but also an automatic rejection of the read result as N_OK if it falls below a certain quality threshold. Old grade New grade Defaults for quality grading A 4 Good B 3 Can be set specifically by user 1) Green2) = Good C 2 Can be set specifically by user 1) Yellow2) = Fair OK D 1 Can be set specifically by user 1) Red2) = Poor N_OK (can be set specifically by the user) F 0 Poor User interface Defaults for the read result OK 1) The user-specific setting is only for ascending or descending order. 2) Color coding in the user interface. Example In an application in which only very good markings are acceptable, all grades below 4 are set to "Poor". This allows the rejection of all unacceptable specimens. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 44 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.3 Verification methods for different application scenarios 4.2.3.1 Verification of printed labels In 1996, the "Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility" (AIM) published the data matrix symbology specification with an evaluation procedure for print quality. According to this evaluation procedure, test systems could evaluate a symbol according to its degree of acceptability (4 to 0). The specification later became the ISO/IEC 16022 standard. This type of test was developed for paper labels with high contrast. It allows a quantitative measurement of the print quality and allows the testing of printed 2D codes based on a quality standard. Here, the important fact is that the printing of a data matrix code on paper is a high-quality process. White paper is printed with black ink to achieve a high contrast. With this background, the threshold values for grading in the ISO/IEC 16022 standard are very restrictive because the marking quality is so high. Less exacting requirements would be neither suitable nor useful in the printing industry. The AIM standard identifies the following typical errors: Blocked ink jets Too much or too little ink Inconsistent application of the ink Inadequate contrast due to a combination of ink color and background color 4.2.3.2 Verification of direct part marks Test procedure In contrast to the printing process, markings applied directly to the part are not ideal as a marking technique. Here, the important thing is that parts are optimized for their primary purpose. It is, for example, more difficult to apply a laser mark to bare aluminum compared with stainless steel. Aluminum is, however, more suitable in the production of parts for aircraft because it is lighter. The weight is therefore more important than markability. With a specimen with a marking on aluminum, the part does not pass the test according to the ISO/IEC 16022 standard due to the low degree of contrast. Here, a verification method suitable for DPM must be used. For open applications, a public standard such as ISO/IEC 15415 or AS9132A should be used. Use AIM DPM-1-2006 for applications with demanding lighting conditions. In contrast to all other verification standards; automatic exposure control is performed here to optimally capture the code to be verified. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 45 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Siemens DPM For closed applications with a focus on checking the marking quality, Siemens DPM verification is the best choice. Siemens DPM verification can be configured very flexibly to be able to test markings applied with a variety of marking methods on different materials. The quality characteristics to be checked can be selected individually. In addition to this, a separate quality evaluation (good/fair/poor) can be set for each selected quality characteristic to give priority to certain characteristics. When combined with a flexible lighting setting, the quality monitoring with Siemens DPM can also solve applications that are too restrictive or simply unsuitable for the public standards. Measuring the marking Each marking is measured based on the quality values and assigned a quality grade. Deviations in the quality grade can usually be attributed to the following causes: Changed marking parameters or errors in the marking device Changed material concepts or surface structure Parts incorrectly secured or traced Changes in a disturbed environment such as oil or light on the part Incorrect securing or tracing of parts Provided with the data of the verifier, the production line remains operational because necessary maintenance or modifications to improve the marking can be performed before the markings become unreadable. The reader provides excellent and robust functions for direct part marking verification. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 46 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.3.3 Examples of defects in the marking quality The following pictures show examples of defects in the marking quality: Figure 4-4 Incorrect or non-uniform cell size in the marking Figure 4-5 Incorrect or non-uniform cell position in the marking Figure 4-6 Incorrect overall geometry of the marking Figure 4-7 Damaged surface of the marking or part Figure 4-8 Very little or non-uniform contrast in the marking SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 47 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.3.4 Verification standards supported Note "Veri-Genius" only available for SIMATIC MV440 readers This option is available only for the SIMATIC MV440 readers. For productive use, you require a Veri license (order number 6GF3400-0SL02). The readers without a verification license support the following: - Verification to ISO/IEC 16022:2000, previously the AIM specification The readers with a "Veri-Genius" license also support the following standards: - Data matrix verification to ISO/IEC 15415:2004 - Data matrix verification to AS9132 Rev A:2005 (previously IAQG) for dot peen marking - Siemens DPM - Data matrix verification to AIM DPM-1-2006 - Barcode verification to ISO/IEC 15416:2000 (previously ANSI X3.182-1990) Note Uncalibrated verification If you select the uncalibrated verification reference, data matrix codes will be evaluated according to ISO 16022 and barcodes according to ISO/IEC 15416. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic calibration. The standard report corresponds to the "Standard Report for ISO/IEC 16022" (Page 69) for data matrix codes or the "Standard Report for ISO/IEC 15416" (Page 73) for verifiable barcodes. Note Verification with the "ID-Genius" decoder If you select the "ID-Genius" decoder (Standard report for the "ID-Genius" decoder (Page 72)), only uncalibrated verification is possible. To maximize the read rate of difficult codes, the evaluation of the code quality is performed in a similar way to ISO/IEC 16022:2000 however with a different implementation. The calculated quality values are therefore to some extent not directly comparable with verification to ISO/IEC 16022:2000. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 48 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Note Demo mode To evaluate the verification standards, the readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series support a demo mode. The demo mode is indicated in the "Task" drop-down list by the addition of "Demo". In the demo mode, remember the following restrictions: * The check box "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" is disabled. No N_OK reads will be generated due to the quality evaluation. * In the verification report, the four-digit quality values are replaced by the word "DEMO". All quality grades will be output as '0' or 'F'. Note Compatibility For the "verify" task, the readers of the SIMATIC VS130 series provided quality parameters that were implemented according to the AIM specification. Please note that the value calculation and output have changed compared with SIMATIC VS130-2. Note Manually readjusting exposure settings You can readjust the read settings manually following normalization and calibration. * Deselect the "From reference" checkbox in the image settings. Please note that the quality values calculated will no longer comply with the standard. * For documentation, use the "formatted output of the verification" that contains the read settings used for image acquisition. For ambitious applications for which no public standard needs to be adhered to, Siemens AG recommends the use of "Siemens DPM". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 49 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4 Data matrix verification 4.2.4.1 Siemens DPM In Siemens DPM verification, the user can select the test parameters to be used and configure the levels "Good", "Fair" and "Poor" for every test parameter individually. The range of options for verification is ideal for process control in data matrix applications in which no public standard needs to be adhered to. Note "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size" The test parameters "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size" are not active in the default setting because these parameters can only make limited statements regarding direct part marks. They can be activated in the adjustment support. Quality parameters Cell size: The overall width divided by the number of columns or the overall height divided by the number rows. The value output is the cell size in mils (milli-inches). The assignment to the quality level is based on the number of pixels: See "Assignment of the numeric grade of Siemens DPM to the quality levels". Center offset: Measurement of the offset of the cell center to the center of the ideal grid starting at the four corners of the codes. Size offset: Measurement of the difference in cell sizes compared with each other. Cell modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflection values of the dark cells compared with the light cells. Border match: Percentage of border cells that match the pattern formed by the four borders of the data matrix. Symbol contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 50 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Angle of distortion: Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the vertical edges measured in degrees. Assignment of the numeric grade of Siemens DPM to the quality levels 4 3 2 1 0 Comment Cell size (CS_) Grade (abbreviation) 10 9 7 5 <5 In pixels Center offset (CO_) 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 >10.0 Without unit Without unit Size offset (SO_) Cell modulation (MOD) 2.5 5.0 7.5 10.0 >10.0 90% 80% 70% 60% <60% Border match (BM_) 95% 90% 85% 80% <80% Symbol contrast (SC_) 70% 55% 40% 20% <20% Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 6% 8% 10% 12% >12% Print growth (PG_) 10% 20% 30% 40% >40% Unused error correction (UEC) 62% 50% 37% 25% <25% 2% 4% 6& 7% >7% Angle of distortion (AOD) Codewords in ECC 200 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 51 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4.2 ISO/IEC 16022 This standard is based on data for printing data matrix codes with black ink on white paper and can normally only be used in such scenarios. Note As the second edition of the ISO/IEC 16022 standard, the ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document refers to the ISO/IEC 15415 standard as a guideline for print quality. Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 16022 to the quality levels 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) Grade (abbreviation) 6% 8% 10% 12% >12% Print growth (PG_) 15% 21% 26% 30% >30% Contrast (SC_) 70% 55% 40% 20% <20% Unused error correction (UEC) 62% 50% 37% 25% <25% Comment Absolute value for x and y SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 52 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4.3 ISO/IEC 15415 This standard is a specification for testing the print quality of barcodes for two-dimensional symbols. The ISO/IEC 16022:2006 document relates to this standard in the guidelines for print quality. Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Fixed pattern damage: Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone around the code necessary for decoding. Grid non-uniformity: This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four corners of a data matrix. Modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light cells of the data matrix. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Is only calculated as a reference, no quality grade is assigned. Reference decode: A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006. Symbol contrast: Difference between the highest and lowest reflectance of the data matrix surface. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 53 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15415 to the quality levels Grade (abbreviation) 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 >0.12 Fixed pattern damage (FPD) Grid non-uniformity (GN_) Modulation (MOD) Comment This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. 0.38 0.50 0.63 0.75 >0.75 This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Print growth Reference only, no grading X and Y Reference decode (RD_) pass fail Symbol contrast (SC_) 0.70 0.55 0.40 0.20 <0.20 Unused error correction (UEC) 0.62 0.50 0.37 0.25 <0.25 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 54 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4.4 AS9132 Rev. A This standard first appeared as a data matrix standard of the IAQG (International Aerospace Quality Group). This standard applies directly to three specific types of marking: Dot peen marking Laser marking Electrochemical etched marking The readers of the SIMATIC MV440 series concentrate on the quality parameters of dot peen markings that are the most commonly used. Module fill and contrast are calculated as a reference but are not included in the overall grading. Quality parameters of dot peen Angle of distortion: Difference between the two solid edges of the data matrix and the vertical edges measured in degrees. Module center offset: Linear deviation of the location of the center point of the cell compared with the center of the ideal grid calculated as a percentage of the nominal cell size. Module size offset: Difference in the apparent size of each individual data element in the data matrix. Module fill: Measurement of the completeness of the ideal grid as a percentage. Nominal module size: Average value of the two values nominal module size X and nominal module size Y. - Nominal module size X is the width of the data matrix in pixels divided by the number of columns. - Nominal module size Y is the height of the data matrix in pixels divided by the number of rows. Ovality: Difference between the widest part of the round cell and the narrowest part of the round cell. Contrast: Difference between the average reflectance of the lightest pixels and the darkest pixels. Calculated only as a reference Note No expanded quality parameters are used for laser marking and electrochemical etched marking. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 55 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grading of AS9132 Rev. A, and the quality levels Grade Angle of distortion (AOD) Module center offset (CO_) 4 3 2 1 0 <3.5 <7 >7 C1<2% C2<2% C2>2% Comment C1 is the number of modules with a center offset less than 10% of the module size C2 is the number of modules with a center offset less than 20% of the module size Module size offset (SO_) C1<2% C2<2% C2>2% C1 is the number of modules with a size offset between 70% and 90% of the module size C2 is the number of modules with a size offset between 60% and 105% of the module size Module fill (MF_) 65%105% <65% or >105% Nominal module size (NMS) Ovality (OV_) Contrast Reference only, 80% is ideal Reference only, no grading C1<2% C2<2% C2>2% C1 and C2 are the numbers of modules with an ovality greater than 20% of the nominal module size Reference only, no grading SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 56 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4.5 AIM DPM-1-2006 This standard is based on ISO/IEC 15415 but includes modifications for more robust measurements of Direct Part Marks. It can be used for a wide range of applications, sectors and marking technologies. The most noticeable differences are the use of automatic exposure control and a much greater contrast tolerance. Quality parameters Axial non-uniformity: Difference between the height and width relative to the rows and columns. Cell contrast: Measure of the uniformity of the average reflectance of the light pixels and the dark pixels. This corresponds to "symbol contrast" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with different details in the implementation. Cell modulation: Measurement of the uniformity of the reflectance of the dark and light areas of the data matrix. Similar to "Modulation" according to ISO/IEC 15415, however with different details in the implementation and lower limits for the quality levels. Fixed pattern damage: Measure of the errors in the borders of the data matrix and all errors in the quiet zone around the code necessary for decoding. Grid non-uniformity: This is the deviation of the measured grid relative to the ideal grid starting from the four corners of a data matrix. Minimum reflectance: The lowest reflectance of any area in the data matrix. Reference decode: A measurement of the data matrix with the result passed/failed. The measurement is based on a binary image of the code to ISO/IEC 16022:2006. Unused error correction: Proportion of error correction information not used for correction of the read result. Print growth: Positive or negative size ratio of the printed cells relative to the ideal grid. Calculated only as a reference. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 57 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Assignment of the numeric grade of AIM DPM-1-2006 to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Axial non-uniformity (AN_) 6% 8% 10% 12% >12% Cell contrast (SC_) 30% 25% 20% 15% <15% Cell modulation (MOD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Fixed pattern damage (FPD) This measurement is made in a three-stage process. There is no direct correlation between the intermediate results and the quality grade. Grid non-uniformity (GN_) 0.38 Minimum reflectance (RMI) 5% <5% Reference decode (RD_) pass fail Unused error correction (UEC) Print growth 62% 0.50 50% 0.63 37% 0.75 25% >0.75 Comment Calculation different from ISO 15415 Calculation different from ISO 15415 <25% Reference only, no grading SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 58 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.4.6 Graphical support for analysis of verification errors Simplifying troubleshooting for marking problems The information used by the reference decoder can be displayed to simplify troubleshooting for marking problems. The detailed view is activated via "Options" - "Extras" tab/verification details. You can see the results using the "Monitoring" link on the start page and in the user interface (Page 223). The following information is displayed: The grid lines by which the cells are separated. The incorrectly marked cells (shown in red). The correctly marked cells (shown in green). Example SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 59 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.5 Barcode verification The principles underlying barcode verification are similar to those of data matrix verification. These principles are, however, diversified to make full use of the characteristics of onedimensional barcodes. ISO/IEC 15416 The code is scanned in several parallel scan lines to obtain a reliable measured value for the marking quality of a barcode. Each scan line has its own set of quality grades and the lowest of these decides the overall quality grade of the reflectance profile of the scan line. The average value of the quality values of the reflectance profile is the overall quality grade of the code. The reader uses ten scan lines that result in individual results for each of the following quality parameters. Quality parameters Scan grade: Lowest grade of all characteristics of the reflectance profile for a scan line. Edge determination: Clarity of the identification of element edges in the scan reflectance profile. Reference decode: A symbology reference algorithm is used to decode based on the edge detection. Maximum reflectance: Percentage of the reflectance of the lightest gap. Minimum edge contrast: Lowest value of the edge contrast. The edge contrast is the difference between the bar reflectance and the gap reflectance of two adjacent elements. Minimum reflectance: Percentage of the reflectance of the darkest bar. Symbol contrast: Difference between the maximum and minimum reflectance. Decodability: The proportion of the available surrounding space (between the ideal dimension of an element or a combination of elements and the relevant reference threshold value) that is not used by the element or the combination of elements. The ratio is calculated for the element or the combination of elements that deviates most from the ideal dimension. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 60 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Defects: Irregularities in elements and quiet zones measured based on the non-uniformity of the reflectance of the elements. Modulation: Ratio of the minimum edge contrast to the symbol contrast. Start quiet zone: Area outside the start codeword with a length of 10 modules. Stop quiet zone: Area outside the stop codeword with a length of 10 modules. Assignment of the numeric grade of ISO/IEC 15416 to the quality levels Grade 4 Scan reflectance profile Lowest single grade per scan line 3 2 1 0 Edge determination pass fail Reference decode pass fail Minimum edge contrast (MEC) 0.15 <0.15 Minimum reflectance (RMI) 0.5Rmax >0.5Rmax Symbol contrast (SC_) 0.70 0.55 0.40 0.20 <0.20 Decodability (DEC) 0.62 0.50 0.38 0.25 <0.25 Defects (DEF) 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 >0.30 Modulation (MOD) 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 <0.40 Quiet zone (QZ_) 10 modules Comment Rmax is the maximum reflectance. < 10 modules SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 61 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.6 Calibration and activating verification Calibrate To be able to use the reader as a verifier, a calibration consisting of the following two steps must be performed: 1. System normalization, 2. Reflectance calibration. Calibrating the reader ensures that with every test setup, correct and reproducible results are returned in keeping with the selected standard. You will need to calibrate the reader the first time you commission it in your production area. Calibration library Calibrations are created as elements in the verification library according to the procedure described below (Normalizing the reader (Page 63)/Calibrating the reflectance (Page 64)). Then, you can reference a stored calibration in one or more programs.. There must be stable lighting conditions The conditions must be stable in the operating environment of the verifier. If the position of the device or the ambient lighting or ambient temperature changes, recalibration is necessary. Without calibration, the results may fluctuate considerably. Regular recalibration it is necessary for stable results: If for example, you perform a verification once with high surrounding brightness and another time with very low surrounding brightness. After successful recalibration of an element of the verification library, all programs that reference this element can be used immediately. Siemens AG recommends that you operate the reader with its own lighting. You should also shield the reader and the code to be measured from the surrounding light. Normalizing system and calibrating the reflectance The reader is supplied with a calibration card; see chapter Calibration card (Page 391). Once you have set up the reader in the location where it will be used, the system needs to be normalized and the reflectance calibrated with the calibration card. The reflectance calibration specifies the correct calculation of the contrast and the size measurements of the test system. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 62 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.6.1 Normalizing the reader During normalization of the reader, the reaction of individual cameras in various lighting surroundings and under various lighting conditions is set directly proportional to the contrast. Brightness offset, gain and exposure time of the camera are set to achieve this linear response. Procedure Normalize the reader as follows: 1. Make sure that you have stable and uniform illumination of the working area of the reader, in particular the surrounding lighting. Refer also to the introductory remarks in "Calibration and activating verification". 2. Place the calibration plate in the viewing range of the reader. 3. Position the black square in the center below the reader. Note: If, during processing, the code to be read is always positioned in a region below the reader that is clearly offset from the center, you should also position the black square in this region. 4. Position the frame around the square so that it surrounds the entire square with a narrow white margin on each side. 5. If required to meet the requirements of your application, configure the maximum exposure time and brightness. To achieve a good image quality, the maximum brightness for the verification is more restricted than when using the device as a reader. 6. Start the normalization and, if necessary, follow the instructions for eliminating errors. See also Warnings and notes (Page 339) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 63 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.6.2 Calibrating the reflectance Procedure Calibrate the reflectance as follows: 1. Place the calibration plate in the viewing range of the reader. 2. Position the data matrix (with approximately 80% contrast) in the center below the reader to achieve uniform lighting. Note: If, during processing, the code to be read is always positioned in a region below the reader that is clearly offset from the center, you should also position the data matrix in this region. See also Normalizing the reader (Page 63) . 3. Enter the values for contrast and maximum reflectance specified on the calibration card in the appropriate boxes. 4. Start the calibration and, if necessary, follow the instructions for eliminating errors. The following values are now calculated: - Cell scaling: The calibration card has a fixed cell size. From this, the calibration function calculates the image scaling in milli-inches (mil) per pixel. - Avg. gray scale value: During calibration, a mean light histogram of the code is calculated. The mean light is the average value of the background when the background and foreground are separated by the minimum variance. - Histogram peak low: The peak value of the brightness of the image background. - Histogram peak high: The peak value of the brightness of the image foreground. Recommended cell sizes for verification of 2D codes Camera resolution Min. cell size Max. cell size Max. cell size (16 x 16 cells) (32 x 32 cells) 640 x 480 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 SR) 10 mil 30 mil 15 mil 1024 x 768 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 HR) 7 mil 50 mil 25 mil 1600 x 1200 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 UR) 4 mil 90 mil 45 mil Calibration code takes up approximately half the image height. Calibration code represented with 10 pixels/cell. Target size: Max. 80 % of the image height Target size: Min. 10 pixels/cell SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 64 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Recommended module widths for verification of 1D codes Minimum module width: 4 pixels Recommended module width: 5 pixels Maximum module width: 20 pixels Camera resolution Min. module width Max. module width 640 x 480 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 SR) 5 mil Depends on code type, number of coded characters 1024 x 768 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 HR) 4 mil 1600 x 1200 pixels (SIMATIC MV440 UR) 3 mil Calibration code takes up approximately half the image height. Target size: Min. 5 pixels/module 4.2.7 Formatted output of the verification One important feature of a verifier is the ability to document results. To allow this, the reader provides verification reports that can be accessed over the various interfaces. If a verification report has been configured, this is generated and output each time a read was successful. A verification report consists of two parts: The verification settings, The verification result. Verification settings With %v (lower-case "v"), you obtain an output of the all the settings relevant for verification in the printed order. All field values are separated by semicolons. The field names are not part of the report. Field name Value Exposure time 0000 ... 9999 Brightness 0000 ... 0999 Brightness offset (coarse) -255 ... 0255 Brightness offset (fine) -255 ... 0255 Histogram peak low 0000 ... 0255 Histogram peak high 0000 ... 0255 Cell scaling * 100 0000 ... 9999 Target contrast 0000 ... 0100 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 65 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Field name Value Maximum reflectance 0000 ... 0100 Minimum X dimension 0000 ... 0999 Maximum X dimension 0000 ... 0999 Avg. gray scale value 0000 ... 0255 Calibrated exposure time 0000 ... 9999 Calibrated brightness 0000 ... 0999 Light source Wavelength List of characteristics Name of the lamp 0000 ... 9999 Abbreviation:P[GFP][GFP][GFP]G List of characteristics Note Verification according to AIM-DPM-1-2006 The standard-compliant verification according to AIM-DPM-1-2006 works with automatic exposure control. The value output for "Exposure time" in the verification settings therefore differs from the value of the "calibrated exposure time" and corresponds to the value selected by the exposure control. The characteristics list consists of the abbreviation for a quality parameter followed by five letters. The five letters represent the quality evaluation ([G]ood, [F]air, [P]oor) associated with the possible grades 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or F, D, C, B, A (in each case, in this order). For Siemens DPM, the characteristics list contains 10 entries since all the quality characteristics can be configured individually here. For all other standards, only the overall grade is output whose evaluation is relevant for all grades. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 66 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8 Verification result %V (upper-case "V") gives you a standard test report with all valid grades and evaluations. This report is automatically adapted to the verification standard stored in the program. All field values (grades and evaluations) are separated by a semicolon. The field names are not part of the standard report. If you do not require all the grades and/evaluations, the test report can be composed of the individual tags %Q.. or %q.. Note Combination of multicode and verification * If you select the verification task "uncalibrated", all the data matrix codes found are evaluated according to ISO 16022 and all barcodes according to ISO/IEC 15416. The evaluation is, however, made without any basic calibration. The standard test report is automatically adapted to the standard being used for each code. * If you select a specific verification method, this is used for all matching code types, other code types are not evaluated. * If a read code has not been evaluated, the output of the verification report for this code is skipped. Note Verification error Whenever a verification error occurs, all quality grades are output as "E" and the error number is output instead of the quality values. Please see Read and verification error messages (Page 342) for information on the meaning of the error number. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 67 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.1 Standard report for Siemens DPM Note Grades and evaluations in the standard report for Siemens DPM The standard report for Siemens DPM only ever contains the grades and evaluations whose quality characteristics are activated in the adjustment support. With the default setting, activated quality characteristics include all characteristics except for "Symbol contrast" and "Cell size". Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 5 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: F Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Unused error correction grade (Q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Cell modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell modulation 1 (q6) 0 ... 100 Cell modulation 2 (q6) 0 ... 100 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size grade (Q10) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell size (q10) 0.0 ... 99.9 mil Center offset grade (Q19) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Center offset (q19) Size offset grade (Q20) Size offset (q20) Border match grade (Q21) Border match (q21) Angle of distortion grade (Q22) Angle of distortion (q22) ECCLevel (q14) 0.0 ... 99.9 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.0 ... 99.9 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0 ... 100 4, 3 or 0 -45 ... 45.0 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 68 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.2 Standard report for ISO/IEC 16022 Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 4 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: E Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Axial non-uniformity (q2) 0.00 ... 1.00 Print growth grade (Q9) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Unused error correction grade (Q4) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Unused error correction (q4) 0.00 ... 1.00 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil ECCLevel (q14) 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 69 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.3 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15415 Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 2 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: C Evaluation (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3) Grid non-uniformity (q3) Unused error correction grade (Q4) Unused error correction (q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 Fixed pattern damage grade (Q5) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Print growth X (q9) -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil Aperture (q12) 0, 4 ... 20 mil (0 corresponds to automatic) ECCLevel (q14) 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 70 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.4 Standard report for AS9132, Rev A Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 3 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: D Evaluation (Qs) Overall grade (Q0) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Module size offset grade (Q20) 4, 3 or 0 Module size offset 1 (q20) 0 ... 99.9 Module size offset 2 (q20) 0 ... 99.9 Module center offset grade (Q19) 4, 3 or 0 Module center offset 1 (q19) 0 ... 99.9 Module center offset 2 (q19) 0 ... 99.9 Angle of distortion grade (Q22) 4, 3 or 0 Angle of distortion (q22) -45 ... 45 Ovality grade (Q23) 4, 3 or 0 Ovality (q23) 0.00 ... 99.9 Module fill X (q9) 0 ... 200 Module fill Y (q9) 0 ... 200 Contrast (q1) Nominal module size (q10) ECCLevel (q14) 0 ... 100 0 ... 99.9 mil 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 71 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.5 Standard Report for AIM DPM-1-2006 Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 1 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: B Evaluation (Qs) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell contrast grade (Q1) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Grid non-uniformity grade (Q3) Grid non-uniformity (q3) Unused error correction grade (Q4) Unused error correction (q4) 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 Fixed pattern damage grade (Q5) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Cell modulation grade (Q6) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum reflectance grade (Q8) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum reflectance (q8) Print growth X (q9) 0 ... 100 -100 ... 100 Print growth Y (q9) -100 ... 100 Cell size (q10) 0 ... 99.9 mil Current mean light (q11) 0 ... 255 Aperture (q12) 0 ... 999 Percentage aperture (q13) ECCLevel (q14) 4.2.8.6 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 50, 80 or 0 200 Height (q15) 0 ... 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 ... 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 Standard report for the "ID-Genius" decoder Field name (TAG) Overall grade (Q0) Symbol contrast grade (Q1) Symbol contrast (q1) Axial non-uniformity grade (Q2) Axial non-uniformity (q2) Unused error correction grade (Q4) Unused error correction (q4) Print growth grade (Q9) Print growth (q9) Value 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0 ... 100 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 0.00 ... 1.00 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 -999 ... 999 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 72 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.2 Code verification 4.2.8.7 Standard report for ISO/IEC 15416 The verification report for barcode verification according to ISO 15416 is significantly larger than the reports of other standards because the results are output separately for each of the 10 scan lines. With a standard report (%V), the values are output sorted according to scan lines, in other words, first the fields "Scan line grade", "Edge determination grade", "Minimum reflectance grade", "Maximum reflectance grade", ... for scan line 1, the same fields for scan line 2 etc. The "Verification type" to "Overall grade" and "Module size " to "Angle" fields are output only once in the standard report either at the very beginning or at the very end. In an individually formatted verification report, the fields are sorted according to scan lines as long as they follow each other directly without a separator in the formatting instruction. Example "%Qt;%Q24%Q25" generates a report in the form: Verification type; 10 x [scan line grade; edge determination grade]. "%Qt;%Q24;%Q25" generates a report in the form: Verification type; 10 x [scan line grade];10 x [edge determination grade]. Field name (TAG) Verification type (Qt) Value 6 If the exposure settings do not comply with the standard: G Status (Qs) 3 (Good), 2 (Fair) or 1 (Poor) Overall grade (Q0) 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Overall grade (q0) 4.0 ... 0.0 Scan line grade (Q24) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0 Edge determination grade (Q25) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Reference decode grade (Q7) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum edge contrast grade (Q26) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Minimum edge contrast (q26) Minimum reflectance grade (Q8) Minimum reflectance value (q8) Symbol contrast grade (Q1) Symbol contrast (q1) Modulation grade (Q6) Modulation (q6) Defects grade (Q27) 10 values: 0 ... 100 10 values of 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0 ... 100 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0 ... 100 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Defects (q27) 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 Decodability grade (Q28) 10 values: 4, 3, 2, 1 or 0 Decodability (q28) 10 values: 0.00 ... 1.00 Maximum reflectance value (q18) Start quiet zone (q29) 10 values: 0 ... 100 10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 73 Image processing 4.2 Code verification Field name (TAG) Value Stop quiet zone (q30) 10 values: 0.00 ... 10.00 Nominal module size (q10) 0 to 99.9 mil Aspect ratio 1 (q31) 1.00 ... 5.00 Aspect ratio 2 (q32) 1.00 ... 5.00 Aspect ratio 3 (q33) 4.2.8.8 1.00 ... 5.00 Height (q15) 0 to 9.99 inches Width (q16) 0 to 9.99 inches Angle (q17) 0 ... 360 Standard report for OCR and OCV The standard report uses OCR grades when the function of OCR steps is being used. Field name (TAG) Value Verification type (Qt) 7 Poorest character quality (q40) 0 ... 255 Minimum character height (q42) 0 ... 255 Maximum character height (q43) 0 ... 255 Greatest confusion risk (q44) 0 ... 255 Average character quality (q45) 0 ... 255 Average confusion risk (q46) 0 ... 255 Combination of decoder and OCR steps If you use decoder as well as OCR steps in a program: The report belonging to the selected verification standard or (if "uncalibrated") the standard report belonging to the code type read is used. The OCR qualities can also be output via the relevant tags. See also Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) (Page 75) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 74 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Optical Character Recognition and Optical Character Verification "Optical character recognition" (OCR) allows not only machine-readable codes but also human-readable plain text to be recognized and machine-processed. With "Optical Character Verification" (OCV), "the plain text read can also be compared with target specifications and deviations in the read result detected. The readability of the text can be accessed and rejected using a threshold value for the reading quality. However, this OCV functionality is very different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison of the printed image with a template. This task is not covered by the OCV functionality. 4.3.1 Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus There are two high-performance character recognition processes (Page 391) which can be activated as required depending on the application requirements. Text-Genius Plus offers all the benefits of Text-Genius character recognition plus additional performance features. 4.3.2 Performance features of Text-Genius character recognition Highlights of Text-Genius character recognition Flexible reading of multiple fonts such as OCR A, OCR B, without time-consuming training Fast and reliable reading (up to 1 000 reads per minute) Lines of plain text and machine-readable codes can be flexibly combined and read in one single image. Automatic text localization Automatic line detection (up to 12 x 15 lines) Flexible reading of character heights of between 15 and 220 pixels Reading of up to 12 image regions with independent settings Reading of mirrored, rotated and inverted text Numerous filter and comparison functions SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 75 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Integrated universal fonts Fonts optimized for machine reading The following fonts optimized for machine reading are supported: Font Typeface OCR-A OCR-B Semifont M13 "Polyfont" setting With the "Polyfont" setting, the following fonts (and similar fonts) are automatically detected and read especially well and reliably. Font Typeface Courier Letter Gothic Arial Helvetica SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 76 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Font Typeface Century Eurostile Frutiger Futura medium Franklin Gothic medium Lucida Sans Bookman medium 4.3.3 Performance features of Text-Genius Plus character recognition Text-Genius Plus character recognition includes all Text-Genius character recognition functions, but is far more advanced. Highlights of Text-Genius Plus character recognition Text-Genius Plus provides all Text-Genius functions. Adjustment to printed image in the application: - Special character fonts, e.g. with special characters - Various different printing procedures (e.g. laser, ink, scribed, needled) - Variations of characters SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 77 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) You can vary characters by creating your own fonts in the reader. Multiple styles can also be saved for each character. Up to five user fonts can be used in the reader. A wide range of standard fonts are available as a basis. Specific font creation ensures an optimal distinction between characters which are hard to distinguish. Excellent performance: - With 300 items/min: Up to 150 isolated characters + DMC per item - With up to1000 items/min: Up to 24 isolated characters per item High read reliability with very good print quality: - > 99.5 % with 24 isolated characters per item - > 99.5 % with 150 isolated characters with DMC match (per item) Optimization of custom fonts by supervised training in processing mode. 4.3.4 Supervised training The Text Genius Plus character recognition supports process optimization through supervised training. For this, character forms which were detected with less than optimal quality are recorded in processing mode. The recorded data can be used to improve custom fonts and optimize their reading reliability. 4.3.5 Examples of plain text applications: The following examples illustrate applications that can be solved with the "Text Genius" license and how some of the functions can be configured. Prerequisites SIMATIC-MV440 Code Reader (not SIMATIC MV420!) Firmware version V5.0 or higher (older versions can be upgraded) The Text Genius or Text-Genius Plus license must be have been transferred to the reader (see "Transferring optional licenses (Page 142)" for more information) Application 1: Read single-line plain text on various materials 1. Select a program or the template from the "Programs" task. 2. Add a new OCR step. 3. In the "Read" tab in the image displayed, set the region of interest (ROI) containing the text to be read in this OCR step. 4. Adjust the read settings to the image details. 5. Press the "Update" button on the "Read" tab in Image Control to briefly check whether your settings are correct. If the settings are correct, a read result will be displayed. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 78 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Remember the following Provide for adequate contrast for the text. The character height must be within the range of 15 to 55 pixels. Character heights of up to 220 pixels are possible if you have configured the undersampling function in the "Improve image" field. The text orientation should be approximately horizontal. The deviation from the horizontal must be < 5. If possible, avoid dirty backgrounds and interfering edges in the text field. The follows images illustrate capability for reading with the default settings using a real example: Figure 4-9 Read results: 9238072 Figure 4-10 Read results: 9230120 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 79 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) The following images demonstrate capability for reading using real examples with varying character boldness: Figure 4-11 Read results: F4KEWF4KWY7C Figure 4-12 Read results: 15010829006116 Figure 4-13 Read results: 15010826009503 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 80 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Application 2: Decoding a data matrix code and reading plain text in the same image The task Both the data matrix code and plain text must be read from the image in the same read cycle. The plain text is located next to the data matrix code in this example. Both codes are printed together, so they are always legible and do not overlap. The reading results must be output via an interface. 1. If there is no decoder step yet, add a decoder step to the template under "Programs". 2. Add an OCR step and proceed as in application 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 81 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Note Avoid disturbing structures within the ROIs If possible, avoid disturbing structures within this ROI, which might be confused with text: e.g edges or portions of the data matrix codes. 3. Save these settings in the template and return to the "Adjustment - Set image" page. Both the data matrix code as well as the plain text is found: Preview of reading result ]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08 691234567890\x0A(21)132N246mN543o4935\x0A(17)080318\x0A(1o)x251211ooo4935\x0 A Explanation of this reading result The reading result of code and plain text recognition is sequentially displayed. The "\x0A" output indicates that a new line in the read text begins at this point. The result of the plain text recognition is still not correct using the default settings for character recognition. Note Why does this happen? Since plain text is not clearly defined, several reading tasks can be correctly performed even by humans only due to their previous knowledge, expectations and experience. To work reliably and consistently, mechanical optical character recognition also requires this type of previous knowledge. The more knowledge you can provide for your application, the better. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 82 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) Such reading errors can be easily eliminated if you provide some information for more reliable and consistent character recognition. Go through the parameters of the OCR step in Programs/Template, starting with the "Read" tab. 1. Select the following setting for ROI position when the decoder step is the first processing step in the step sequence: "ROI1-oriented". This means that the ROI of the OCR step follows the position of the data matrix code in the current image and is always positioned just right for reading. 2. Character spacing: In the example, the characters are printed very close, so you change the setting from "Default" to "Narrow". 3. Characters occurring: Restrict the alphabet your application uses to the characters that are actually used, i.e. '()0123456789X "(can also be entered as: "()[ 0-9] X") After saving these settings, the read result in "Adjustment - Set image" appears as follows: ]d201086912345678902113234246797654304935\x1D1708031810X2512110004935(01)08 691234567890(21)13234246797654304935(17)080318(10)X2512110004935 The plain text has now been read correctly with these settings. Many more options are available on the other OCR tabs, with which you can provide more information and make further adjustments to your application. To do this, use the information about the parameters in the online help! Note Increasing read reliability and processing speed If you are working with a Text-Genius Plus license and save the typeface as a user-defined character font, you will improve read reliability and increase processing speed. See also OCR program steps (Page 187) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 83 Image processing 4.3 Optical character recognition with "Text-Genius" and "Text-Genius Plus" (SIMATIC MV440 only) 4.3.6 Quality characteristics in optical character recognition Fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition To obtain fast feedback about the reliability of the character recognition: In much the same way as code verification, during optical character recognition, quality characteristics are calculated and output on the user interface or via the interfaces. Quality characteristic Value output Poorest character quality The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability value of all the characters found. Since plain text cannot be uniquely identified, a probability is calculated for a character that is found. This can be interpreted as a match between the printed a theoretical, "ideal" character. Highest confusion risk The value output is the poorest (lowest) probability difference of all the characters found. For each identified character position, up to seven character hypotheses each with their own probability are calculated. The hypothesis with the highest probability is selected as the read result for the character position. The confusion risk is the difference in probability between the two hypotheses with the highest evaluation. Minimum character height Height in pixels of the smallest character found measured perpendicular to the reading direction. Maximum character height Height in pixels of the highest character found measured perpendicular to the reading direction. Average character quality Average probability of all characters found Average confusion risk Average probability difference for all characters found Assignment of the numeric evaluation of OCR to the quality levels Grade 4 3 2 1 0 Poorest character quality (OCQ) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Highest confusion risk (OCC) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Minimum character height (OCL) > 26 and 30 > 30 and 20 and 45 and < 20 < 40 < 25 < 50 or or 50 40 and < 45 Maximum character height (OCH) > 26 and 30 > 30 and 20 and 45 and < 20 < 40 < 25 < 50 or or > 50 40 and < 45 Average character quality (OAQ) 208 156 104 52 < 52 Average confusion risk (OAC) 208 156 104 52 < 52 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 84 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Image acquisition options The image acquisition options of the reader were developed for a wide range of applications. There are three different ways of controlling image acquisition and processing: Single trigger Auto-trigger (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Scan (not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B) Architecture of the internal processing sequence The principle underlying the processing performed by the reader is a buffered processing method in three steps: Image acquisition Decoding (reading) Outputting. Between each processing step, the reader has a buffer and you can configure the size of the buffer depending on the application. This allows the ideal throughput to be achieved in every processing step resulting in the maximum overall throughput for the reader and a flexible application. ,PDJHEXIIHU 5HVXOWEXIIHU 2XWSXWWR SURFHVV 7ULJJHULQJ ,PDJHDFTXLVLWLRQ Figure 4-14 'HFRGLQJ 2XWSXWRIUHVXOWV Architecture of the internal processing sequence SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 85 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 4.4.1 "Single trigger" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, one image is acquired per trigger followed by one read. If several objects need to be acquired in a very short time, acquired images can be buffered before they are processed. Up to 50 objects can therefore be acquired at an image frequency of more than 80 images per second and then processed (SIMATIC MV440 SR models at half resolution). To allow this, the images can be buffered and the image buffer size can be selected: SIMATIC MV420 can buffer 15 images. SIMATIC MV440 SR and SIMATIC MV440 HR can buffer 50 images. SIMATIC MV440 UR can buffer 30 images. The reader transfers the results of the reads as soon as it has processed them. "Image buffer size 1" setting If the image buffer size is set to the value 1, this mode corresponds to a sequential processing chain of trigger image acquisition processing result transfer. The next trigger comes only after processing is completed. Trigger interval Trigger Image acquisition Decoding Transfer of results Cycle time Figure 4-15 Cycle time limit Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size 1 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 86 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing "Image buffer size > 1" setting With image buffer sizes greater than 1, intermediate buffering takes place between image acquisition and processing and between processing and result output. In other words: Image acquisition can at times be performed in a faster sequence and processing can also buffer results briefly prior to transfer. This allows brief periods of peak load to be handled. Image buffer size Cycle time limit Object Trigger Image acquisition Decoding Results transfer Cycle time Figure 4-16 Time diagram of option single trigger for image buffer size > 1; buffer = 2 in this example SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 87 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 4.4.2 "Auto trigger" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, codes entering the viewing field of the reader are read automatically. In this case, the reader does not require any external trigger signals, for example from a light barrier. This option is particularly suitable for the following objects: Objects with which precise triggering using a light barrier is difficult. The monitoring frequency with which the reader monitors the viewing field can be higher than 90 Hz, for example SIMATIC MV440 SR with half resolution and good DMC quality. The "Auto trigger" option operates in time with the steps. The acquired images are decoded in the same clock cycle. The "Auto trigger" option can therefore be used continuously without time limits. To optimize the power used by this function, the monitoring can be started by an initial trigger and can then terminate itself after a selectable time or a falling trigger edge. Trigger Image acquisition Decoding Acquisition interval Acquisition interval Transfer of result Figure 4-17 Time diagram of the Auto trigger option SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 88 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout 7ULJJHULQLWLDWHV SURFHGXUH 7ULJJHUVLJQDO LVLJQRUHG 7ULJJHULQLWLDWHV SURFHGXUH 7ULJJHU ,PDJHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'HFRGLQJ [ 5HVXOWVWUDQVIHU QRWIRXQG 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition 4 Set timeout [ [ 2. Triggers after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred. Figure 4-18 Time diagram auto trigger with initial trigger and timeout Note 1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)! Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1} SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 89 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Auto trigger edge-triggered with timeout 5LVLQJWULJJHUHGJHLQLWLDWHV SURFHGXUH 7ULJJHUVLJQDO LVLJQRUHG 7ULJJHU ,PDJHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'HFRGLQJ [ 5HVXOWVWUDQVIHU [ QRWIRXQG [ [ 2. 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition 4 Timeout Rising trigger edges after the procedure has started are ignored until the result has been transferred. Figure 4-19 Time diagram auto trigger with the edge-triggered start/stop option Note 1 (limit of the decoding time) = 3 (interval of image acquisition)! Number of acquired images = {(Timeout/Acquisition interval) - 1} SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 90 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 4.4.3 "Scan" image acquisition option How it works With this setting, the reader is suitable for scanning codes located, for example, on a rotating axle. In contrast to the "Auto trigger" option, acquired images can also be buffered and processed later. Only one code is read per trigger signal. The code must be fully visible in one of the acquired images. If a code cannot be decoded in any of the acquired images, an N_OK read is output. With the default settings, with first read success following triggering, the read result is output and further processing of the scan sequence is exited. With the "Options"/"Image sequences" function, you can change this behavior as follows: With the selection Result output: "Best read result", all configured image acquisitions are made and evaluated. Following this, the qualitatively best read result is output. If you select "All read results", all the configured image acquisitions are made and evaluated and all successfully evaluated image acquisitions are output. By using the "edge-triggered start/stop" option, you can adapt the image acquisition sequence dynamically to your process using a trigger signal. Trigger start scanning. Trigger signal is ignored. Next trigger starts new scan. Trigger Number of image acquisitions Image acquisition 1 Decoding 1 2 OK Nothing found Transfer of result Nothing found 3 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition Figure 4-20 2 Time diagram of the scan option with multiple trigger signals SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 91 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 5LVLQJWULJJHUHGJHVWDUWV SURFHGXUH $IWHUDIDOOLQJWULJJHUHGJHQR IXUWKHULPDJHVDUHDFTXLUHG 7ULJJHU 1XPEHURILPDJHDFTXLVLWLRQV ,PDJHDFTXLVLWLRQ 'HFRGLQJ [ 7UDQVIHURI UHVXOW [ 2. 1 Limit of the decoding time 2 Image acquisition time 3 Interval of image acquisition Figure 4-21 [ 1RWKLQJIRXQG Time diagram scan with the edge-triggered start/stop option 4.4.4 Image acquisition in program sequence mode How it works You can enable the "Program sequence" option on the "Extras" tab in "Options". With this option, you can evaluate several image acquisitions with different image settings for each trigger, if, for example: Objects have a very large dynamic range in terms of contrast and reflectance, that cannot be covered with one image acquisition setting. Codes or plain text must be searched for and read at different, defined positions. Several, possibly even different evaluations (for example with different code settings) must be made per object. The number of definable regions of interest of an individual code setting/OCR setting is not adequate. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 92 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Evaluation attempts In "Program sequence" mode, processing is attempted with up to five saved codes for each trigger. With the default setting, a separate image is acquired and evaluated with the settings saved for the particular code for every code in the program sequence. Following the first successful evaluation, processing of the trigger is stopped and the result is output. "Best read result" and "All read results" settings In program sequence mode, as with the image acquisition option "Scan", you can use the "Best read result" and "All read results" settings. If you select "Best read result", evaluations are attempted with all activated codes. All successful evaluations are compare based on a selectable quality criterion. The qualitatively best result is output. If you select "All read results", an evaluation is also attempted with all activated codes. All successful evaluations are compared output. Same image settings for all codes to be evaluated If you want the same image settings to be used for all codes to be evaluated, you can also activate the "Use 1st image" option. In this case, only one image acquisition is made for each trigger. The settings of the code in the program sequence which has the lowest number are used. The image acquired is then used for processing all codes in the program sequence. 4.4.5 Match options for Track&Trace tasks 4.4.5.1 Trigger-synchronized matching (XMATCH command) Note Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. The XMATCH function is extremely versatile and optimized specifically for Track&Trace applications. XMATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC)" (Page 233) explains the XMATCH command. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 93 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Properties of this function The comparison default (match string) can be changed "on the fly" from object to object. The match default can be set separately and individually for all codes (including multicode) and lines of plain text (OCR steps) to be read. A synchronization mechanism ensures the checking of each individual object without gaps. The function is optimized for manufacturing processes including those with very high object rates, in other words, for high manufacturing speed. Integration in the plant is possible via Ethernet/TCP, ASM or RS-232. Example of an application $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 7&3$6056 ;0$7&+ 3HUPDQHQWIODJ %HVWEHIRUH 7ULJJHU,' &RGH1R &RGH,G[RU52,,' 0DWFKVWULQJ &RGH,G[RU52,,' 0DWFKVWULQJ 0DUNLQJV\VWHP 5HDGHUZLWKLQWHUQDOWULJJHUFRXQWHU /LJKWEDUULHU 2EMHFW &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ &RQYH\RU GLUHFWLRQ 2SWR;0$7&+FRPPDQGVEXIIHUHG SOXVSHUPDQHQW SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 94 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing A typical example of the use of XMATCH it is a manufacturing process in which packaging is printed with individual information: Use by date Serial number Manufacturing location etc. The information can be represented both as 1D/2D code or as plain text. The task of the reader is to check that the printing is correct and readable. A match string is assigned using the three indexes trigger ID, program number and ROI ID (OCR) or code index ("Read code"). Synchronization is achieved with a trigger ID. The trigger ID is a counter of the external trigger signals. This counter is reset to "1" by the reader at the start of processing mode, when there is a program change, and following an error. The match strings are buffered. The match string buffer has the following size: Maximum of 200 KB with SIMATIC MV440 readers Maximum of 100 KB with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P At the same time, it is also possible to buffer in advance: A maximum of 20 trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV440 readers A maximum of ten trigger IDs with SIMATIC MV420 SR-P. With XMATCH, you can also send match strings with a "permanent flag" that become valid starting at the next trigger or after a specific trigger ID. Up to two permanent settings (XMATCH with permanent flag) can be buffered. If a third permanent setting is received, the last received setting is overwritten. Example If the permanent buffer is empty, XMATCH commands with a permanent flag are received with the trigger IDs 50, 150, and 100 one after the other. The buffer then contains the corresponding match strings for the trigger IDs 50 and 100. Availability of XMATCH The availability of XMATCH depends on the image acquisition mode. With single trigger, autotrigger with initial trigger and scanning, the full functionality of XMATCH is available. In the image acquisition mode "autotrigger" (no external trigger signal), XMATCH can only be used with a permanent flag and trigger ID "0". This means that the new match strings are valid starting at the next image acquisition. Logging the received match strings If enabled under Options/Diagnostics&Monitoring ("Match string frames" checkbox selected), the match strings in the diagnostic data sets will also be logged. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 95 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing 4.4.5.2 Simple match (MATCH mode and MATCH match) Note MATCH command not suitable for changing during production In contrast to the XMATCH command, the MATCH command is not suitable for changing during production. For comparison tasks that are not complex, the match string can: Be specified permanently when the program is saved. be specified by a simple MATCH command from a connected controller or a PC. MATCH is available via the interfaces TCP, RS-232 and ASM. The section "Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 233)" explains the MATCH command and the structure of the MATCH command in detail. Static match default when saving a program For applications in which the match default is already known during commissioning, the match can be defined and activated when the program is saved. Match options are available for 1D/2D codes on the "Decoder"/"Match options" tabs under" "Options". To compare a plain text with "Text-Genius" optical character recognition: The default can be specified separately for each OCR step in "OCR/Filter", "String specification". The comparison is activated with "OCR"/"Output". Simple comparison default by the connected controller/PC The use of the MATCH command it is practical if, for example, the current date, the batch number or similar needs to be updated prior to the start of production. The MATCH command can be sent to the reader via the TCP, RS-232 and ASM interfaces. The match string received by the reader is valid as of the next trigger. The sent match string remains valid: until another match string is sent until processing mode is ended (for example by a fault) If a further match string was sent and in the meantime no evaluation was triggered, the previously sent match string is overwritten. If the relevant comparison mode is enabled, a sent match string for the comparison of the content is used in the following situations: A single 1D/2D code For each single 1D/2D code (with multicode) For each OCR step SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 96 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing Logging the received match strings If the received match strings are not deactivated, the match strings are logged in the diagnostics data records. With a suitable format text, used match strings can be output as the result string and also logged in the diagnostics data records. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 97 Image processing 4.4 Options for image acquisition and image processing SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 98 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.1 5 Overview You have the following options for the acquisition and processing of recognition values during system configuration of the reader: PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile PROFINET IO with RF180C and FB45 or Ident profile Onboard PROFINET IO and FB79 or Ident profile RS232 interface *) Ethernet interface (TCP/IP) SIMATIC S7-300 with ASM475 and FB45 SIMATIC ET 200M with ASM475 and FB45 SIMATIC ET200pro with RF170C and FB45 EtherNet/IP with RF181EIP *) With SIMATIC MV420 only available when the ASM interface is not being used. Note No separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420 There is no separate ASM connector in the SIMATIC MV420. The ASM interface is implemented via the digital I/O cable and must be connected via this when required. The applications listed below are also available with SIMATIC MV420. Other possible combinations include: Reader and RFID reader on an ASM 456 Auto-trigger Image display via WinCC flexible External lamp SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 99 Network and system interfacing 5.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile 5.2 System setup via PROFIBUS DP with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFIBUS DP environment 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK 8VHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP b9b'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86'3 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUV\VWHP &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-1 Example: System setup via PROFIBUS DP-V1 with ASM 456 and FB45 or Ident profile System characteristics Attachment to PROFIBUS is via the ASM interface of the reader and an ASM 456. The connection to an automation system is established via PROFIBUS DP. The reader is controlled via PROFIBUS DP-V1 by the automation system with a function block FB45 or Ident profile. The results are output to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The power for the reader is supplied by the ASM 456 (SIMATIC MV440 only). The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O or the automation system or by the integrated autotrigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 100 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile 5.3 System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values in a PROFINET IO environment 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH 5)& $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),1(7,2 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUV\VWHP &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-2 Example: System setup via PROFINET IO with RF180C, FB45 or Ident profile System characteristics Attachment to PROFINET is via the ASM interface of the reader and an RF180C. The connection to an automation system is established via PROFINET. The reader is controlled via PROFINET by the automation system with a function block FB45 or Ident profile. The results are output to the automation system via PROFINET. The power for the reader is supplied via an RF180C (SIMATIC MV440 only). The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, the ASM (PROFINET) or by the integrated auto-trigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via the Ethernet port to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 101 Network and system interfacing 5.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile 5.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile Acquisition and output of recognition values with a PROFINET IO device Note Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) If the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE X108 POE, the power IO RS232 cable is not needed. Note PoE functionality not available for older devices PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following order numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * * * * 6GF3440-0GE10 6GF3440-0CD11 6GF3440-0GE11 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 102 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.4 System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH 6ZLWFK $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP (WKHUQHWFDEOH 3RZHU,256FDEOH ,2FDEOH &RQYH\RUV\VWHP 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-3 Example: System setup of the reader as PROFINET IO device and FB79 or Ident profile System characteristics There is a connection to a PROFINET IO compliant automation system via Ethernet and a switch. The reader is controlled by the automation system. The results from the specimens are output to the automation system via PROFINET IO. The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, PROFINET or by the integrated autotrigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 103 Network and system interfacing 5.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface 5.5 System setup via the RS-232 interface Acquisition and output of recognition values via the RS-232 interface 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW &RQYH\RUV\VWHP /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-4 Example: System setup via the RS-232 interface System characteristics The reader results are output via the RS-232 interface. The reader is triggered either via the digital I/O, RS-232 or by the integrated auto-trigger function. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 104 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface 5.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface Acquisition and output of recognition values with Ethernet Note Power supply with "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) The power IO RS-232 cable is not needed if the reader is supplied by PoE, for example when connected to a SCALANCE X108 POE. Note PoE functionality not available for older devices PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following order numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * * * * 6GF3440-0GE10 6GF3440-0CD11 6GF3440-0GE11 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 105 Network and system interfacing 5.6 System setup via the Ethernet interface 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH 6ZLWFK (WKHUQHWFDEOH $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP (WKHUQHWFDEOH 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW &RQYH\RUV\VWHP /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-5 Example: System setup via the Ethernet interface System characteristics The reader results are output via the Ethernet interface. The reader can be triggered in the following ways: - Digital I/O - TCP/IP - The integrated autotrigger function A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet and a switch to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 106 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module 5.7 System setup for reader and RFID reader on a communication module 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH $60FDEOH 352),%86b'3 :ULWHUHDGGHYLFH HJ5)5 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUV\VWHP &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-6 Example: System setup for reader with RFID reader on a communication module System characteristics To operate in mixed mode, the reader can be connected to an RFID SLG, for example of the RF300 series on a communication module, for example, an ASM 456. Both the reader and the RFID reader are integrated in STEP 7 by the function block FB45 or Ident profile. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 107 Network and system interfacing 5.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger 5.8 System setup for the reader with auto-trigger 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86b'3 &RQYH\RUV\VWHP 2EMHFW &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-7 Example: System setup for reader with auto-trigger function System characteristics Power supply and system integration are, for example, via an ASM 456 or via Ethernet. To trigger the reader, a light barrier or similar must be installed; the triggering itself is performed on the reader as soon as a legible code enters the reader viewing field (auto trigger). A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 108 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible 5.9 System setup reader and WinCC flexible 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH 6ZLWFK +0,3DQHOHJ 03 (WKHUQHWFDEOH (WKHUQHWFDEOH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86b'3 3RZHU,256FDEOH &RQYH\RUV\VWHP 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-8 Example: System setup reader with WinCC flexible System characteristics The image is displayed on the Web pages of the reader (see also "System setup for reader and HTML browser (Page 110)for WinCC flexible on a PC with WinCC flexible, an HMI Panel MP 277 or MP 377. The results from the reader are obtained and displayed by WinCC flexible via a connection to the automation system. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 109 Network and system interfacing 5.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser 5.10 System setup for the reader and HTML browser 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH 6ZLWFK +0,3DQHOHJ 03 (WKHUQHWFDEOH (WKHUQHWFDEOH (WKHUQHWFDEOH $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86b'3 3RZHU,256FDEOH &RQYH\RUV\VWHP 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-9 Example: System setup for the reader with HTML browser System characteristics For visualization, an HTML browser is used: For example Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC/programming device, Panel PC or similar device. The reader can be monitored via the live image page or diagnostics pages with needing Java VM on the PC/PG. A PC/programming device is connected via Ethernet to allow adjustment of the device. Note Further information For further information, please see "Monitoring via HTML pages" (Page 223). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 110 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Network and system interfacing 5.11 System setup reader and external lamp 5.11 System setup reader and external lamp 3&SURJUDPPLQJGHYLFHZLWK XVHULQWHUIDFH /DPSSRZHU VXSSO\XQLW (WKHUQHWFDEOH 3RZHU,256FDEOH /DPSFDEOH /DPSSRZHUVXSSO\ $60 $XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP 9'& VXSSO\YROWDJH $60FDEOH 352),%86b'3 3RZHU,256FDEOH 2EMHFW /LJKWEDUULHU &RQYH\RUV\VWHP &RQYH\RUGLUHFWLRQ Figure 5-10 Example: System setup reader with external lamp System characteristics An external lamp, for example a lighting unit, can be controlled via an external power supply unit and a stroboscope signal from the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 111 Network and system interfacing 5.12 Other system extensions 5.12 Other system extensions System integration with FB45 Integration into further systems is possible with the FB45 function block: Into SIMATIC S7-300 or ET 200M with communication module ASM 475 Into SIMATIC ET 200pro with communication module RF170C System integration via EtherNet/IP connection System integration via an EtherNet/IP connection is possible with the communication module RF181EIP. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 112 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 6 Installation 6.1 Important notes on installation Note When you install the reader, make sure that the code to be read is visible to the reader with the best possible quality. When you install the reader, use the setup support "Reader adjustment". The following requirements must be met: The code must be clearly visible: - There must be as little reflection in the code field as possible. - The code field must be uniformly lit without shadows. - All the code parts must be sharply imaged. The viewing angle to the code may vary between 40 to 90 and 80 to 90 depending on the code type, see Performance characteristics when reading codes (Page 32). The distance between a two-dimensional code and image border must be at least 2 cell widths. Maintain the quiet zone around the code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 113 Installation 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 The readers are separate compact devices that need to be mounted in a suitable location and only require a lens, a power supply cable and a communications connection. The SIMATIC MV440 reader has four threaded holes on both the front and back (SIMATIC MV420: has two threaded holes) allowing flexible mounting of the device. Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens cover To provide lighting when reading the codes, you have several options available. The simplest and most space-saving option is the ring lamp integrated into the protective lens cover. The SIMATIC MV420 reader has a lens and light already integrated. Built-in ring light Lens M2.5 hexagon socket-head screws Protective lens cover 65 Reader Figure 6-1 Installation of the SIMATIC MV440 reader with protective lens cover and built-in ring light SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 114 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Installation 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 Mounting the SIMATIC MV440 1. Remove the "protective cap of the lens threaded connector", see section: Dimension drawings (Page 361) 2. Install the following: - Your selected lens - The built-in ring light - The protective lens cover 65 3. Select a suitable location to install the device. 4. Drill four holes with the following dimensions at the installation site/use the optional mounting bracket. [ Figure 6-2 SIMATIC MV440 reader drilling template 5. Mount the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 115 Installation 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 Mounting the SIMATIC MV440 reader with a lighting unit If you require a lot of light for the applications, you can connect an external lamp. The external lamp is also used, for example, when the incident light is not parallel to the viewing direction with strongly reflecting objects. 6,0$7,&09659 693-0,3 6LHPHQV$*,QGXVWU\6HFWRU Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 Socket for lighting unit Reader Ring light holder (external) Protective lens cover 50 Securing screws Hole for securing device Figure 6-3 Mounting the SIMATIC MV440 reader with a lighting unit Install the following: 1. Your selected lens 2. Protective lens cover 50 3. Ring light holder (external) 4. Lighting unit 5. At the installation site, screw the reader directly into the securing holes or to the "reader mounting plate", see Dimension drawings (Page 361). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 116 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Installation 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 Mounting the SIMATIC MV420 1. Select a suitable location to install the device. 2. Drill two holes of the following dimensions at the installation site: [ Figure 6-4 SIMATIC MV420 drilling template 3. Mount the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 117 Installation 6.2 Installing SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 118 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 7 Connecting 7.1 Guidelines for installation free of electrical interference To prevent interference, you will need to provide shielding for your system. Low-frequency (LF) and high-frequency (HF) interference signals can result in an incorrect response if the system is badly grounded or not shielded. Interfering signals can be caused by: Switching relays or contactors (large, rapid changes in current or voltage and HF interfering signals). Different ground potentials between two parts of the system (LF interfering signals). NOTICE Class A device to EMC The reader can cause radio interference in residential areas. In this case, you will have to take appropriate countermeasures to prevent radio interference. Use/installation of interference-proof cables Only use the recommended cable to connect the reader. All cable connectors must be carefully and correctly connected. Do not lay signal lines and heavy current lines together. Use a separate cable duct at least 50 cm from the heavy current lines. Note * Refer to the instructions and guidelines in the installation manual SIMATIC Automation System S7-300 Hardware and Installation, section "Wiring". * Please note the guidelines for use of PROFINET IO to control and/or transfer results. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 119 Connecting 7.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) Only connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) to IEC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 WARNING The device is designed for operation with safety extralow voltage (SELV). This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with EC 60950/EN 60950/VDE 0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals. The power unit for supplying the device must comply with NEC Class 2 as described by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70). The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source with limited power (LPS limited power source). 7.2 Power over Ethernet (PoE) "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply technology for network components complying with 802.3af. The power is supplied over the Ethernet cables that connect the individual network components together. This makes an additional power cable unnecessary. PoE can be used with all PoE-compliant network components that require little power (max. 12.95 W). Restriction of the power supply type The IEEE standard 802.3af specifies two types of power supply: Power via pairs of wires that are not used for data transmission (redundant wires). Power via pairs of wires that are used for data transmission (phantom power). The Ethernet connector of the SIMATIC MV440 reader is four-wire. Power can only be suppled via these four wires with phantom power. The device supplying the power must provide the phantom power. The following Siemens switches with PoE provide phantom power: SCALANCE X108POE SCALANCE X308-2M POE SCALANCE XR324-12M POE SCALANCE XR324-4M POE SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 120 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components 7.3 Connecting components Connecting the 24 V DC power supply WARNING The device should only be connected to a 24 V DC power supply which satisfies the requirements of safe extra low voltage (SELV). When the device is operated on a wall, in an open rack or other similar locations, an NEC Class 2 current source is required for the compliance of the UL requirements (according to UL 60950-1). In all other cases (according to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1), a current source with limited power (LPS = Limited Power Source) is required. 24 V DC supply voltage (19.2 to 28.8 V) The generation of the 24 V DC supply voltage by the line-side power supply must be implemented as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according (floating) to IEC 80364-4-41, or as SELV to IEC/EN/DlN EN 60950-1 and LPS/NEC class 2. CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect cables when the power is on. Note Maximum ASM cable length * You can use an ASM with the reader with a maximum cable length of 50 m. * In some situations, longer connecting cables up to 1000 m are possible. In this case, take into account the current consumption of the reader of 0.17 A for SIMATIC MV420 and 0.27 A for SIMATIC MV440. * Avoid connecting more than two cable sections in series to create a longer cable due to the connector resistance. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 121 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components Cable sockets Note Only the SIMATIC MV440 reader has an ASM socket. Note Power supply via for SIMATIC MV440 Ethernet also via Power over Ethernet The power for the SIMATIC MV440 readers can also be supplied using Power over Ethernet (PoE), for example when using PoE switches such as: * SCALANCE X108POE * SCALANCE X308-2M POE * SCALANCE XR324-12M POE * SCALANCE XR324-4M POE Note PoE functionality not available for older devices PoE functionality is not available for older devices with the following order numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * * * * 6GF3440-0GE10 6GF3440-0CD11 6GF3440-0GE11 6GF3440-0CD21 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 122 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors, ASM and RS232 Ethernet socket Combined cable socket for the power supply, I/O connectors and RS232 ASM female connector Ethernet socket Figure 7-1 Cable sockets for SIMATIC MV420 (left) and SIMATIC MV440 (right) Power IO RS232 cable The power IO RS232 cable is used for the power supply, to connect the digital I/O connectors and for the communications interface of an automation system via the RS232 interface. You will find the pin assignment of the Power IO RS232 cable in the following table. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 123 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components Pin assignment of the Power IO RS232 cable NOTICE INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected INPUT - COMMON / OUTPUT - COMMON must be connected before you can use the inputs and outputs detailed below. Table 7- 1 SIMATIC MV440 Pin Color Signal name Possible values Default Meaning H Red 24 V DC G Blue 0V K Violet INPUT1 TRG TRG Trigger input D Yellow INPUT / OUTPUT2 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 IN_OP Freely selectable input or output. L Gray/ pink INPUT / OUTPUT3 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 RDY Freely selectable input or output. C Green INPUT / OUTPUT4 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 READ Freely selectable input or output. B Brown INPUT / OUTPUT5 DISA, SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 N_OK Freely selectable input or output. A White INPUT COMMON P type inputs/outputs: E Gray OUTPUT COMMON Power supply Power supply INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC N type inputs/outputs: Reference point 0 V or 24 V for inputs. Reference point 0 V or 24 V for outputs. INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V J Black STROBE (OUTPUT) Signal output for connecting external flashes F Pink RS232 TXD RS232 send line M Red/blue RS232 RXD RS232 receive line SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 124 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components Table 7- 2 Pin SIMATIC MV420 Color Signal name Possible values Default Meaning H Red 24 V DC Power supply G Blue 0V Power supply K Violet INPUT1 TRG TRG Trigger input D Yellow OUTPUT2 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 RDY Freely selectable output L Gray/ pink OUTPUT3 IN_OP, TRD, RDY, READ, MATCH, N_OK, EXT_1, EXT_2, EXT_3, EXT_4 READ Freely selectable output C Green ASM TxD_N TxD_N signal of the ASM interface B Brown ASM TxD_P TxD_P signal of the ASM interface A White INPUT COMMON E Gray OUTPUT COMMON P type inputs/outputs: Reference point 0 V or 24 V for inputs. INPUT - COMMON = 0 V and OUTPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC Reference point 0 V or 24 V for outputs. N type inputs/outputs: INPUT - COMMON = + 24 V DC and OUTPUT - COMMON = 0 V J Black STROBE (OUTPUT) Signal output for connecting external flashes F Pink RS 232 TxD or ASM RxD_P RS232 TxD, ASM RxD_P RS232 TXD RS232 send line or ASM RxD_P of the ASM interface M Red/blue RS232 RxD or ASM RxD_N RS232 RxD,ASM RxD_N RS232 RXD RS232 receive line or ASM RxD_N of the ASM interface MV400 push-pull power cable cable pin assignment See Technical specifications of the interfaces (Page 359). ASM cable The connectors are already fitted to the ASM cable. Using the ASM cable, you connect the communication modules, for example RF180C and ASM456. For SIMATIC MV420, a special ASM cable with M16 socket is available. Refer to the chapter "Cables" (Page 370). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 125 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components The following cable assignment is defined for the connection to the ASM 475: 6) '&9 6 6 ( ( $&7B (55B 35(B 5['B 6 6 ( ( 6/* $&7B (55B 35(B 5['B 6/* 02%< $60 *7*$ Status and error displays Wiring diagram; the numbers of the connection refer to the X1 connector of the upper housing Figure 7-2 Pin M16 socket Front panel and inside of the front door of the ASM475 module Wire color of the connecting cable Terminal ASM475 (Channel 1/Channel 2) H Red 8 / 16 G Blue 9 / 17 F Pink 4 / 12 M Red/blue 5 / 13 B Brown 6 / 14 C Green 7 / 15 Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 With a preassembled Ethernet cable, you connect a PC / PG to control and operate the reader. Attach the Ethernet cable to a switch to connect the reader to an automation system via onboard PROFINET IO. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 126 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components 7.3.1 Wiring example I/O interface as P type Wire the "Output Common" signal with + 24 V DC and the "Input Common" signal with 0 V. 6 ,0 $ 7 ,& 0 9 6,0$7,&09 2 XWSXW& RP P RQ 2 XWSXW /RDG ,QSXW 9 9 6 Z LWFK ,QSXW& RP P RQ Figure 7-3 I/O interface as P type I/O interface as N type Wire the "Output Common" signal with 0 V and the "Input Common" signal with + 24 V DC. 6 ,0 $ 7 ,& 0 9 6,0$7,&09 2 XWSXW& RP P RQ 2 XWSXW /RDG 9 9 6 Z LWFK ,QSXW ,QSXW& RP P RQ Figure 7-4 I/O interface as N type SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 127 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as P type 3RZHU,256,QWHUIDFH 3W\SH 7[' 5[' ,Q S X W 2 X WS X W &RP P RQ &RP P RQ ,Q2XWSXW ,QSXW ,Q2XWSXW 2XWSXW ( *5(< 5('%/8( $ :+,7( 526$ 0 5[' ) 7[' %/8( 5(' 9 ' & 9 * + 9 9 9 Connecting up the power IO RS-232 interface as N type 3RZHU,256,QWHUIDFH 1W\SH ,Q S X W 2 X WS X W &RP P RQ &RP P RQ $ ,Q2XWSXW ,QSXW ,Q2XWSXW 2XWSXW ( *5(< 0 :+,7( ) 526$ * %/8( 5(' + 7[' 5[' 5('%/8( 9 '& 9 9 5[' 7[' 9 9 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 128 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components 7.3.2 Operating the reader with external lighting Operating the reader with the external lighting unit SIMATIC VS100. Connecting cables If you use a reader with an external lighting unit in your application, wire up your application according to the following wiring diagrams. Note You can work with external lighting if you use the strobe output signal. The strobe signal is high active. The "high active" time corresponds to the ON period of the external lighting. %OXH QF %URZQ %ODFN %OXH 5HG %ODFN :KLWH 6WUREH *QG 3RZHUVXSSO\FDEOH9 *QG 9 9 SIMATIC MV440 reader Power IO RS-232 cable Ring light holder (external) Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 Figure 7-5 Lamp cable DIN rail power unit Bridging Circuit diagram for the external lighting unit SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 129 Connecting 7.3 Connecting components 9ROWDJHVXSSO\ 9 Figure 7-6 *1' 9 %ODFN %OXH 5HG 6752%( - :KLWH * %OXH 6752%( 9 + %ODFN 9 ,OOXPLQDWLRQXQLW %URZQ 6,0$7,&09 9ROWDJHVXSSO\ 9 Detailed circuit diagram for the lighting unit Note The wiring is identical for the SIMATIC MV420 reader. However, the SIMATIC MV420 reader does not have any drill holes for direct mounting of the VS100 lamp. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 130 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.1 8 Prerequisites To commission the device, you require a PC that meets the following requirements: Operating system Windows XP Professional SP 1 or higher An Internet browser with Java Runtime Environment, V1.2 or higher - The user interface is optimized for viewing with Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 and Java Runtime Environment V.1.7.x. SIMATIC Primary Setup Tool (PST) is installed. There is a network connection via Ethernet TCP/IP. Note * Java Runtime Environment is also known as: - Java Runtime - Runtime Environment - Runtime - JRE - Java Virtual Machine - Virtual Machine - Java VM - JVM - VM or - Java-Download . Whenever possible use the latest Java version. You will find information on this on the Internet at (www.java.com) or ask your system administrator. * You will find the Primary Setup Tool (PST) either: - In your SIMATIC installation - On the product CD of the reader - As a free download on the SIMATIC Support Internet pages (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19440762). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 131 Commissioning 8.2 Notes on installation 8.2 Notes on installation To make changes to the network settings of your PC, you require administrator privileges. Check the settings of your PC. To work with the user interface, you require Java Runtime Environment. It is also possible that Java is installed on your PC but is not activated. Check the settings of your Internet browser. When commissioning for the first time, you require the SIMATIC application software Primary Setup Tool (PST). With this application software: - You can browse your network for the reader. - Integrate the reader in your network. - Configure the network connection of your reader. Note SIMATIC Manager The SIMATIC Manager provides the same functions as PST for configuring the reader. In this manual, PST is described as an example. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 132 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Steps for initial commissioning Step Activity 1 Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable. 2 Turn the reader on. 3 Configure the connection between reader and PC. 4 Start the user interface with the Internet Explorer. 5 Adjust the reader using the user interface. Note The user interface of the reader is known as the adjustment support. The adjustment support takes the form of a Java applet stored on the reader and this can be activated using an Internet browser. Step 1 Connect the reader and PC using an Ethernet cable Connect the reader directly to your PC/programming device over an Ethernet cable. Note You do not need a crossover cable because the reader is capable of autocrossing and automatically detects the type of cable you are using. Step 2 Turn the reader on Turn on the power supply for the reader. The reader is supplied with power either via a connected ASM cable or via the power IO RS-232 cable or PoE cable, see also Connecting (Page 119) . Each time it is started, the reader runs a self-test. This is indicated by the Power LED flashing. After a period of between several seconds and 2 minutes, the self-test is completed and the Power LED shines green. The reader is ready for operation. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 133 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Step 3 Configuring the Ethernet connection between reader and PC 1. Start the Primary Setup Tool (Start menu Start SIMATIC Primary Setup Tool Primary Setup Tool). 2. Start the network browsing function in the PST menu (Network Browse). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 134 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 3. Select the displayed device and double-click on it. 4. Clicking on the displayed Ethernet interface displays the properties of the interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 135 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 5. Select "Assign IP parameters" and enter the values for the IP address and subnet mask as shown below. Note IP address 192.168.100.100 * Using the IP address 192.168.100.100 simultaneously configures the reader as a DHCP server, which means that a connected PC can obtain an IP address from the reader. You may use addresses that differ from this IP address and that are not 0.0.0.1 to assign a static IP address to the reader. PCs operating in a network are usually configured as DHCP clients and obtain their IP addresses from a server. * If your PC network is configured differently or you do not know how your PC is configured, check with your system administrator. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 136 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 6. Now select the MV440 or MV420 module again and then load the configuration on the reader by clicking the "Download" menu command in the "Module" menu 7. Confirm the following message by clicking the "Yes" button. Result The reader now has the manually assigned IP address 192.168.0.34 and can be accessed at this address by your PC. Note Depending on the mode being used, you may need to restart the reader by turning the power off and on again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 137 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Step 4 Starting the user interface 1. Open Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the reader in the address bar. 2. Press Enter to confirm. The home page of the reader is loaded. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 138 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 3. Now click on the image of the reader or the "Adjust" menu command. The user interface of the reader will open after a brief loading period. 4. This is followed by the Adjustment page of the user interface in the Internet Explorer. Result The reader is now connected and can be operated from the user interface. You can now perform the next step and adjust the reader and display the first read results. You can also get further support by clicking the "?" button at the top right. This opens the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 139 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface Step 5 Aligning the reader Before you put the reader into productive operation, you must first align it correctly. You do this with the user interface by selecting the "Adjust reader" menu command. The dialog window shows you an image as seen by the reader. Note Focusing the image (SIMATIC MV440 only) You may need to unscrew the set screws in the lens to focus. Note Access online help with the "?" button Each screen of the adjustment support has a "?" button at the top right with which you can open the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context-sensitive help text relating to your current task. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 140 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.3 Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface 1. Position the reader so that the code to be read appears in the center of the image and is focused sharply. The reader automatically attempts to recognize and decode a data matrix code. You can recognize a successful read by the green frame around the code. The more precise the triggering and greater the contrast in the code, the greater the read reliability. 2. If necessary, correct the settings on this page: - Exposure settings - If, for example, you wish to read an EAN13 code rather than a data matrix code, press the "Recognize code type" button. The reader will launch code type recognition and remember the code type it finds for subsequent reads. - Correct the trigger settings to find the correct image acquisition time for moving objects. - Adjust distortion correction to correct significant distortion by the lens (only rarely necessary!). Note If exposure = Auto, the code must be completely in the image after the triggering until the automatic exposure is completed (approximate value: 50 to 100 ms). 3. If you make modifications, save your new settings by clicking the "Apply" button. Result You have successfully commissioned the reader. You can now read codes for your application. You can now make specific settings and save them to individual programs. For detailed information on saving programs and processing, please see Operator control and monitoring (Page 157). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 141 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 8.4.1 Installing a license Procedure You can transfer an optional license to a SIMATIC code reader in three steps: 1. Installing the Automation License Manager 2. Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices 3. Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader Requirements Note Licenses are only transferable if they have been released for the target system You can only successfully transfer licenses if they have been released for the target system. You can, for example, transfer the Text-Genius or Veri-Genius license to the SIMATIC MV440 reader but not a STEP7 license. 1. step: Installing the Automation License Manager Install the Automation License Manager (ALM) from the SIMATIC MV420/440 Product CD-ROM (ALM\Setup ALM\setup.exe): - If no Automation License Manager (ALM) is installed on your PC. - If the ALM is older than V4.0 SP5. Follow the instructions in the setup program: Reboot the PC if necessary. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 142 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 2nd step: Install the MV plug-ins for code reader devices Install the MV plug-in from the directory ALM\Setup MV Plugin on the SIMATIC MV420/440 Product CD-ROM. Follow the instructions in the setup program: Result Your PC is now ready for the transfer of licenses to SIMATIC code readers. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 143 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 3. step: Transfer a license to a SIMATIC code reader NOTICE Reader must be stopped for license transfer The reader cannot be in RUN mode when transferring a license to the reader. * Ensure that the reader is stopped. Note The reader only tolerates one Automation License Manager connection The reader will only tolerate one Automation License Manager connection at a given time. You cannot connect two PCs to the reader at once. * Disconnect the first connection before attempting to establish a new connection from another PC. 1. Run Automation License Manager. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 144 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 2. Open the MV plug-in with "Edit" "Connect target systems" "Connect code reader system": SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 145 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 3. Enter the IP address of the reader and press the OK button: SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 146 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 4. The reader will now appear in the tree in the left half of the window. 5. Navigate to the drive that contains the license to be transferred (for example, Text Genius), and select the license with the mouse. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 147 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 6. Then select the command, "Transfer" "Key" "Transfer" in the "License Key" menu. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 148 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses 7. In the dialog that opens, select the reader as the destination drive and confirm with "OK". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 149 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 150 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses Following the successful transfer, the license is displayed on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 151 Commissioning 8.4 Transferring optional licenses Result You have successfully transferred the license and the license is now available on the reader. Note If adjustment support was open during the transfer, you must reopen it for the license to become visible in the adjustment support. Then terminate the connection to the reader ("Disconnect target system"). 8.4.2 Removing a license Note Adjustment support open during transfer If adjustment support was open during the transfer, you will need to reopen adjustment support for change to become visible in adjustment support. If a license is no longer required on a reader: Transfer the license from the reader to a different destination drive. The functionality according to the license is available only in demo mode after removing the license. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 152 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives Note Additional DHCP servers disrupt communication in the network If you want to operate the reader as a DHCP server, there must be no other DHCP servers in the network. Any additional DHCP servers cause disruptions in the communication in the network. When it is supplied, the reader is set to DHCP client and does not interfere with communication in the network. Selecting the network configuration requires precise knowledge of the network environment in which the reader will be used. In the simplest situation, the reader is connected directly to a PC as described in Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface (Page 133). During initial commissioning, you select the IP address which decides whether or not the DHCP server integrated on the reader is enabled. If it is not, the device operates as a DHCP client. Operating modes Note Connecting to network once configuration is complete and is checking settings Operating the reader as DHCP server can disrupt communication in an existing network. Do not connect the reader to the network until you have completed the configuration and checked your settings carefully. You can operate the reader in the following modes: DHCP Manual DHCP server PROFINET mode These modes allow the reader to be operated as follows: As a direct connection with a PC with or without a DHCP server. In a network with several nodes with or without a DHCP server. As a PROFINET device in a PROFINET network. You can change the network settings with the "Connections" menu command in the user interface following initial commissioning. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 153 Commissioning 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives Operating the reader in DHCP client mode In "DHCP" IP mode, the code reader obtains its network address from a DHCP server. Note Unique reader device identifier on the nameplate Depending on the network structure, the DHCP server needs to be informed of the MAC address, the unique device identifier of the reader. You will find the MAC address, for example on the rating plate of the reader. Note DNS name for the reader If your network administrator can assign a DNS name (Domain Name Service) for the reader, you can address the device using its name in much the same way as an intranet server. Operating the reader with a static IP address Assign the network address manually in "Manual" IP mode. Enter the IP address and the subnet mask to suit your network configuration and, if applicable, a gateway address. Note IP address in the same subnet as the IP address of the communications partner The IP address of the reader must be in the same subnet as the IP address of the communications partner. Note Gateway not required for direct connection A gateway is not necessary for a direct connection between the reader and a PC/PG. Operating the reader in DHCP server mode In "DHCP server" mode, a connected client can obtain its IP address from the reader. No other DHCP server may be activated in the network. In this mode, you can connect up to four PCs to the reader via a switch since a maximum of four IP addresses can be assigned automatically. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 154 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Commissioning 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives Operating the reader in PROFINET mode In PROFINET mode, you can: Connect the reader to the PC or programming device in your existing PROFINET IO network. Integrate the reader as a device into a PROFINET IO network. Assign the reader the IP configuration of the PROFINET IO controller Note IP configuration cannot be set on the reader The IP parameter settings for the reader are made in STEP 7. It is not possible to set the parameters on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 155 Commissioning 8.5 Selecting connection alternatives SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 156 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.1 9 Overview The user interface of the reader uses the Internet browser of your PC. The user interface is stored on the reader and is loaded when it starts up and is executed in the Internet Explorer. This device version has the following advantages: You do not need to install the software on your PC. You can start the user interface from any PC. You can monitor the reader from more than one PC at the same time. The user interface always executes in a way suitable for your reader. This means that no version conflicts occur. You will find the requirements of your PC in Section Notes on installation (Page 132). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 157 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.1 Structure of the user interface To open the user interface, follow the instructions in the chapter: Commissioning (Page 131). The structure is presented here based on the example of the "Adjustment" task page in the user interface. This information applies to all task pages of the user interface. Figure 9-1 Structure of the user interface Language setting At the top right, there is drop-down list where you can select the language. You can change the language setting for the entire user interface and online help at any time. The following languages are available: English German French Spanish Italian Chinese (Simplified) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 158 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Online help Note Access to online help with the "?" button or CD Each screen of the adjustment support has a "?" button at the top right with which you can open the online help at any time. The online help opens with the context-sensitive help text relating to your current task. The online help is also saved on the CD so it can be used offline. The user interface of the reader is based on a Web server and has the following dialog boxes for image evaluation: Tasks In the left part of the user interface, you will find a selection of tasks in the form of buttons. You can start the required task by clicking the appropriate button. The dialog for this task then opens on the right side of the user interface. At the same time, the text of the buttons changes to bold and the font color becomes white. You can select the following tasks: Adjustment - Set image Adjustment - Save program Connections - Specify interfaces and plant integration Programs - Specify processing task Process - Select and start program Options - Make general device settings Information - Access device, statistical and diagnostic information Maintain - Save/restore settings, run firmware updates and enter the VeriCode(R) license Stop - Stop processing mode SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 159 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Image control Figure 9-2 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, e.g. "Cyclic", "Triggered (live)", or "Program X". Table 9- 1 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 160 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs": You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift. This option is also available with the keyboard: Shift: - Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels) - Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys: - Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments. - Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel. Users and user rights The reader allows different levels of access control for different users. Logging on users The "logon" area is displayed above the tasks. Here, users log on and can then work with the permissions assigned by the administrator. Note Hardware access protection (DISA bit) enabled Hardware access protection (DISA bit) has been activated: A user can only log on if the Options page - Security tab is active. To do this, click on the currently logged on user at the top right. The following users are set as defaults: WEB (default): General user who can perform tasks without explicitly logging on. WEB (WEB role) Service (role: Service) User1 (role: User1) Users create and change passwords as required. Admin (role: Admin The "Admin" user assigns rights for all users. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 161 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Password" input box Users enter their current password in the "Password" input box and then click the "Log on" button. The following table shows the defaults for the passwords. User Default password WEB WEB Service Service User1 User1 Admin Admin Currently logged-on user and mode of the user interface The following is displayed at the top right: The currently logged-on user (for example WEB). The following icons or no icon. Padlock with red marking Read-only mode, i.e. no further operator input is possible because the user interface of another PC has control of the reader. Padlock with gray marking The logged-on user is not authorized to change settings. Padlock with red/gray marking DISA is active. Only users that have the "Take control" right are capable of taking over control of the reader from the controller. Padlock with green/gray marking The user currently logged on has control of the reader or has taken over control from the controller. DMC code The reader is active. Before you can make changes, you first have to change the reader to STOP. Note: As an alternative, you can use the button at the bottom left to change to "Stop" mode without leaving the current page. The access protection is activated. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 162 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Controlling the reader via an automation system If the reader is controlled via an automation system, i.e. with the DISA bit set, you will need to log on to the reader as follows: 1. Make sure that only one PC is accessing the reader (padlock with red/gray markers). 2. Place the mouse pointer on the currently logged-on user (top right) and click. This brings you to the "Security" tab on the "Options" page. 3. To control the reader, log on as "User1" or "Service" user. This is only possible if the "Take control" check box is selected for the relevant user. Remember that, by logging on, you intervene in reader control by the automation system. This is only relevant for functions that require the DISA bit, for example program changes and saving programs. Status display Figure 9-3 Status display (SIMATIC MV440) The reader and its three status LED displays appear below the task buttons. The status LEDs indicate the current status of the reader. LED designation Meaning POWER GREEN, permanently on The reader must be switched on before it can be accessed via the user interface. This LED therefore lights up a constant green. ETHERNET Permanently off The reader is not connected to the Ethernet. Either the reader is off or the Ethernet cable has been disconnected. Flashing YELLOW There is an active connection to the user interface. STATE/SF Permanently off The reader is in "Stop" mode, i.e. there are no errors GREEN, permanently on The reader is in RUN mode, i.e., there are no errors RED, permanently on The reader is in "Group error" mode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 163 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.2 Adjustment - Adjust image With this page, you start the adjustment of the reader. Figure 9-4 Adjust reader - Set image Instructions Brief instructions on setting up the reader are displayed in a text box at the top left. Recognizing the code type New as of V5.0: The reader supports machine-readable code for code type recognition. For example, if you wish to set up a new code, press the "Recognize code type" button. The reader will detect the code type and add it to its decoding order. Image settings You will find all the necessary settings here for the correct configuration of image acquisition. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 164 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Image control Figure 9-5 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, e.g. "Cyclic", "Triggered", "Triggered (live)", "Live". Table 9- 2 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 165 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs": You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift. This option is also available with the keyboard: Shift: - Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels) - Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys: - Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments. - Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel. Apply button Applies and saves the settings made on this page to the template ("Save program" template). "Save program >>" button The "Save program >>" button takes you to the "Save program" page. Last result Displays the result of the last successful processing, if available. Information also appears below the results field about the current processing status. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 166 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Quality / value The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according to the selected verification standard. To obtain the details of the quality characteristic, move the mouse over the quality abbreviation (for example "OCQ") and a tooltip with more information will open. Table 9- 3 Bar color and meaning Color Length Meaning Green Long Quality grading is "Good" Yellow Medium Quality grading is "Fair" Red Short Quality grading is "Poor" Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the overall grade If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value. When you click on it again, the bar display is restored. If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for all characteristics. Clicking again returns you to the bar display. Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see Barcode verification (Page 60) The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality characteristics for extremely poor quality codes. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 167 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.3 Adjustment - Save program You reach this page by pressing the "Save program>>" button on the "Adjustment - Set image" page. Figure 9-6 Adjust reader - Save program In this step, you once again have the option of positioning the ROIs (Regions Of Interest) for the current task and current image. The ROIs are predefined in the template and can be accessed using the "Programs" task. Save programs: To be able to use the code or plain text saved as a reference for match mode. To be able to toggle the reader between different programs for adjustment to various different batches, recipes, modules and workpiece types. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 168 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Image control Figure 9-7 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, e.g. "Current", "Triggered (live)", "Program x". Table 9- 4 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 169 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Moving an ROI with the mouse or keyboard Only available with the tasks "Adjustment" and "Programs": You can change the size of the ROIs shown in the image control using drag and shift. This option is also available with the keyboard: Shift: - Using the arrow keys: larger increments (10 pixels) - Ctrl + arrow keys: Shift pixel by pixel Pressing the shift key at the same time activates ROI size change with the arrow keys: - Shift + arrow keys: Changes the size in larger increments. - Shift + Ctrl + arrow keys: Changes the size pixel by pixel. Save program Clicking the button saves the settings stored in the template and the selected image with the program number specified. "<< Set image" button Click this to return to the "Adjustment - Set image" page. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 170 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.4 Connections The Connections task consists of the following three parts: Interfaces Integration Digital I/O Interfaces On the "Interfaces" tab, you specify the communications interfaces and the parameters for the interfaces. Figure 9-8 Connections - "Interfaces" tab The "Interfaces" tab has the following group boxes: Ethernet Here, you set the parameters for the Ethernet port. PROFINET IO Here, you set the parameters for the PROFINET IO interface. These input boxes are enabled when you select "PROFINET mode" in the "IP mode" drop-down list. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 171 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface ASM Here, you set the baud rate for communication with a communication module (ASM). The communication module provides options for interfacing, for example with PROFIBUS DP. CustomGUI You set the access rights of a CustomGUI for the Web API interface. RS232 Here, you set the parameters for the integrated RS232 port. TCP Here, you set the parameters of the TCP/IP connection via which, for example, you can send the result string. Archiving/MMI Here, you enter the address of a server to which you send images and/or data records for diagnostics. Enter a monitoring time after which the system will re-check for a connection between reader and server after failure to establish a connection. You can also specify the address of a remote client that is allowed to perform the functions described in "Remote client" (Page 324). Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 172 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Integration You specify the following on the "Integration" tab: How the signals reach the reader. How the results and diagnostic data are output. Figure 9-9 Connections - "Integration" tab Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 173 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Digital I/O Figure 9-10 Connections - "Digital I/O" tab (SIMATIC MV440) On the "Digital I/O" tab, you specify the assignment of digital inputs and outputs, of the LED displays and of the beep tone. Assignment of the inputs and outputs SIMATIC MV440 The reader has six digital inputs and outputs, four of which can be freely assigned. Each of these four pins can be configured both as an input or an output. SIMATIC MV420 The reader has a digital trigger input and three digital outputs. Two of the three outputs can be freely assigned. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 174 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface LEDs In the "LEDs" dialog box, you specify the output signal with which the freely programmable LED displays are to be connected. SIMATIC MV440: Two freely programmable LEDs SIMATIC MV420: One freely programmable LED display DI/DO You set the switching time of the digital outputs READ, MATCH, N_OK and EXT_1 to EXT_4. Beep tone (acoustic signal) You configure the acoustic sensor. The beep tone only exists with the SIMATIC MV420. Table 9- 5 Configuring the acoustic sensor Task Possible values Default Meaning Adjustment Off, READ READ Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for adjustment mode. Processing mode Off, READ, Off MATCH, N_OK * OFF: No signal * READ: Short acoustic signal when code could be read. (The higher the tone, the better the read reliability of the code.) Configures the acoustic signal (beep tone) for evaluation mode (RUN). * OFF: No signal * READ: Short acoustic signal when code could be read. (The higher the tone, the better the read reliability of the code.) * MATCH: Acoustic signal when the code comparison was successful. * N_OK: Acoustic signal when reading was not possible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 175 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Figure 9-11 Connections - "Digital" I/O tab (SIMATIC MV420) Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 176 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.5 Programs The Programs task allows you to set the type of processing which the reader executes in a cycle. This task is the main task of the user interface and offers a wide range of options. They enable you to adjust the reader to suit a wide range of read tasks in line with your requirements. Scope of programs The "Programs" tasks includes: The image acquisition control functions The lighting selection Read task parameter assignment broken down into a sequence of read steps (steps) The output formatting of results Management and processing of verification and character font libraries The template for new programs The maximum number of programs: 15 Key function of the template The template contains the default settings. These are, for example, used to create new programs in just a few clicks of the mouse with Adjustment - Save program. The settings made in the Adjustment - Image task are saved in the template. The template is used to create new programs in the "Programs" task. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 177 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.5.1 Graphical user interface elements Figure 9-12 Programs The screenshot shows the interface and interface elements. Table 9- 6 Programs and template Template for creating programs Table 9- 7 Steps Image acquisition step Decoder step (variable number) Character recognition step (OCR, variable number) Result step (fixed) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 178 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Table 9- 8 Step tab For the read settings of a step For the filter settings of a step For the result settings/formatting of a step Libraries The "Libraries" button opens a list of available libraries. Clicking on an entry opens the library view and allows you to edit the library and its entries. Table 9- 9 Control elements Save step (creates the program) Inserts a program/step/library element Deletes a program/step/library element Image control Figure 9-13 Image control Image control is displayed for many of the task pages. Image control contains the image, and for some tasks also the overlays. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 179 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Image" drop-down list You select the image source, e.g. "Current", "Triggered (1x)", "New". Table 9- 10 "Image" drop-down list symbols Update display Updates the image display and also updates the result display, if necessary. Show details Enables and disables the display of result details in the image. A right click on the button opens a shortcut menu in which the details to be displayed can be selected. Zoom Switches between the display of the entire image (reduced) and the image section in full resolution. Full screen Opens the image in full size and full resolution in a new window. Save image Saves the currently displayed image on your PC. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 180 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.5.2 Image acquisition and decoder program steps Image acquisition step - "Image settings" tab Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Figure 9-14 Image acquisition - "Image settings" tab On the "Image settings" tab, you define all the settings which affect image acquisition: Image format Resolution Exposure time Brightness Correction of automatically calculated shutter speed Trigger delay Image distortion correction You can view the result of your settings "live" in the image control. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 181 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Image acquisition step - "Control" tab Figure 9-15 Image acquisition - "Control" tab You can define exactly how the reader acquires images. The most important settings: Single trigger Autotrigger Scan This is also where you specify the lighting connected: further information in available in Image processing/image acquisition (Page 85) Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 182 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Decoder step - "Read" tab Figure 9-16 Decoder - "Read" tab This tab is used to define: The decoding method you work with. The code types to be read. The ROI is limited in the image control: Drag the rectangle with the mouse Whether the ROI follows the result of a preceding step. Whether one or more codes are read in the ROI. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 183 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Decoder step - "Quality" tab Figure 9-17 Decoder - "Quality" tab If you wish to assess the code quality (marking quality), you define the quality criteria here. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 184 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Decoder step - "Result" tab Figure 9-18 Decoder - "Result" tab This tab is used to define: The format in which the read result is output. The criteria by which the comparison with a specification was successful. The conditions where the code did not meet the requirements and which probably led to the overall result "N_OK". Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 185 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Decoder step - "Advanced" tab Figure 9-19 Decoder - "Advanced" tab In this tab, you can set parameters that may speed up the decoding process. In difficult read conditions, the settings you make can help improve reader read reliability. Note Code must meet the specifications - otherwise decoding slows down considerably! This tab contains expert settings which, when applied correctly, can speed up the decoding process and improve read reliability in difficult conditions. However: If a code to be read does not meet the specifications that have been set, decoding can slow down considerably or even fail completely. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 186 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.5.3 OCR program steps Note OCR function only available for SIMATIC MV440 The OCR feature is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader and requires an additional license. You set the optical character recognition in OCR. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 187 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface OCR step - "Read" tab Figure 9-20 OCR - "Read" tab In this tab, you can set all options for image pre-processing and for the OCR algorithm: The character font The ROI in the image control Orientation and polarity of the text Character spacing Image enhancement filter Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 188 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface OCR step - "Filter" tab Figure 9-21 OCR - "Filter" tab The character recognition configured in the "Read" tab provides "character hypotheses" with an associated quality value for ambiguous characters at each character position. "2" and "Z" or "0" and "O", for example, are ambiguous character pairs. Using the settings in this tab, you can provide information about your application and filter out irrelevant results. This increases the reliability of the read result. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 189 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface OCR step - "Result" tab Figure 9-22 OCR - "Result" tab In this tab, you then define: The format in which the read result of the selected step is output. The conditions you want for this ROI in relation to the MATCH and N_OK signals. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 190 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface OCR step - "Advanced" tab Figure 9-23 OCR - "Advanced" tab In this tab, you set parameters that can increase the reading accuracy in especially difficult reading situations. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. See also Text-Genius and Text-Genius Plus (Page 75) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 191 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Program result step Figure 9-24 Result step You specify how the results of the program steps are to be combined as an overall result. You also adjust error messages to your application. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 192 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.6 Libraries and library tabs The library concept available for SIMATIC MV400, version 5.0 and higher, allows you to centrally configure central functions and settings. The central configuration is then repeatedly used in programs and program steps. For example, you can generate and configure user-defined character fonts in the character font library. You can save up to five user-defined character fonts as library elements in the character font library. The defined character fonts can be referenced and used in multiple OCR steps of a given program or indeed in multiple programs. symbol in the top right of the The libraries are accessed by clicking on the "Programs" task and selecting one of the available libraries: 9.2.6.1 Verification library Note Verification is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader. The verification library is used to define verification settings and calibrate the reader for code verification. You can run up to five calibrations and save them as library elements in the verification library. You can then reference the verification library elements in the image acquisition of a program. Referencing specifies the parameters for code verification in this program for image acquisition and the decoder steps. The calibrated image acquisition may not always be enough for applications with highly specific image acquisition requirements. In this case, you can overwrite the settings specified by calibration in image acquisition. Note Verification results no longer comply with standard In this case, the verification results will not comply with the standard; this is indicated by a change in the verification type shown in the verification report. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 193 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Verify" tab Figure 9-25 Verification library - "Verify" tab You specify the verification standard and define the lighting you want to use. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 194 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Calibrate" tab Figure 9-26 Verification library - "Calibrate" tab 1. Run reader calibration and normalization on this page. 2. Save the result. Regular calibration is necessary for good reproducibility To achieve good reproducibility, the reader must be calibrated at regular intervals. Calibration is required: When the setup is changed. When something changes in the surroundings, such as ambient brightness or ambient temperature. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 195 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Achieving reproducible results To obtain reproducible results: You must make sure during the commissioning of the reader that the device can be operated without being influenced by changes in the brightness of the surroundings, for example due to shielding. The setup must be implemented according to the requirements of the standard being applied. Ensure that the resolution is correct (> 10 pixels with DMC). The complete code must be sharply imaged. No dirt on the lens or on the chip. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. "Save" tab Figure 9-27 Verification library - "Save" tab SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 196 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Name" input field Specify the name under which the current verification will be saved. The entry is optional. Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters. "Number" input field Specify the number with which you want to save the verification. Value range: 1 to 5 "Save now" button Clicking on this button saves the current verification under the name specified "Discard changes" button This button discards the changes made since the verification was last saved. If the verification is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 197 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.6.2 Character font library Note The character font library is only available for the SIMATIC MV440 reader. You can use the character font library to define your own character fonts for use in OCR steps. A greater range of applications is possible with user-defined character fonts than with predefined fonts. For example, special characters can be recognized and accurate recognition of the printed image makes recognition more reliable. The processing time required is also shorter than with predefined fonts. You can create up to five user-defined character fonts and save them as library elements in the character font library. You can select any of the character font library elements as character fonts in the OCR steps of a program. Creating a user-defined character font You can create your own, user-defined character font in four steps: 1. Compile image collection ("Image collection" tab) 2. Generate prototypes ("Create" tab) 3. Assign and evaluate prototypes ("Assign" tab) 4. Save character font ("Save" tab) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 198 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Image collection" tab Note Saving necessary acquired images All actions you perform in this tab can affect the content of the diagnostic image memory. If you still require the acquired images which it currently contains, you will need to save them; "Information" task, "Diagnostics" tab (Page 213). Figure 9-28 Character font library - "Image collection" tab In this tab, you specify the acquired images on which you want to base the prototypes for your custom font. The images that are currently in the diagnostic image memory of the reader are displayed first. Use the "Remove" button to clear the acquired images which you do not need. Use the "Add" button to add the image currently displayed in the image control to the collection. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 199 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Generate" tab Figure 9-29 Character font library - "Generate" tab In this tab, you define the image specifications for selecting the prototypes of the custom character font. Character prototypes show the representation, form and typeface of the characters in the character set. The "Update display" button lets you preview the prototype search on the displayed image. If the result matches your expectations: Press the button. This extracts the prototypes for the user-defined character font. The prototypes are extracted from all acquired images selected in the "Image collection" tab with their current settings. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 200 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Assign" tab Figure 9-30 Character font library - "Assign" tab This tab gives you an overview of: The generated character prototypes and their automatic assignment to a character class. The prototypes contained in the character font and their assignment to a character class. In this tab, you can also: Add new prototypes to the character font and assign them to a character class. Delete prototypes you do not need from the character font. Correct wrong assignments by changing the assignment of a prototype to a character class. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 201 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Assigned prototypes must be checked Check whether the prototypes have been assigned to the right character class. 1. To do so, click on the character classes on the left. 2. Check whether the assigned prototypes match. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. "Save" tab Figure 9-31 Character font library - "Save" tab "Name" input field Enter the name under which the current character font is to be saved. The entry is optional. Possible values: Letters, numbers and underscores. Maximum of 10 characters. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 202 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Number" input field Specify the number under which the character font is to be saved. Value range: 1 to 5 "Save now" button Clicking on this button saves the current character font under the name specified. "Discard changes" button This button discards the changes made since the character font was last saved. If the character font is new and has not yet been saved, it will not be saved and will be lost. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 203 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.7 Run The change to "processing mode" means the start of the evaluation. The selected program is run and the read results displayed. Machine-readable codes and/or plain text can be read, compared and checked depending on the task of the selected program. The result of processing is displayed in processing mode. Note Operating and monitoring via the user interface can lead to longer cycle times. Figure 9-32 Processing mode Text box At the top left of the dialog you will see a static text with important information on the processing mode. "Program" drop-down list ("program sequence" for program sequence mode) Select the program you want to start. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 204 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface "Start" button Starts reader operation with the selected program. "Trigger" button To optimize plant integration or read results, for example, you can send a trigger signal manually during commissioning. This function is, however, only enabled for the user with the "service" role when this user has the right to take over control. Quality / value The current values of the quality characteristics are displayed in the form of a bar according to the selected verification standard. To obtain the details of the quality characteristic, move the mouse over the quality abbreviation (for example "OCQ") and a tooltip with more information will open. Table 9- 11 Bar color and meaning Color Length Meaning Green Long Quality grading is "Good" Yellow Medium Quality grading is "Fair" Red Short Quality grading is "Poor" Black The value is only for information and is not used to decide the overall grade If you click on a bar, you can display the corresponding value. When you click on it again, the bar display is restored. If you click on the title of the quality characteristics, you change to the numeric display for all characteristics. Clicking again returns you to the bar display. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 205 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Barcode quality characteristic display on the user interface Ten scan lines which return individual results are used to measure the quality of barcode marking. The overall grade is equivalent to the average quality of all scan lines; please see Barcode verification (Page 60) The individual grades displayed on the user interface each represent the average value of the quality characteristic. However, these average values are calculated solely from scan lines for which valid quality values could be calculated. For example, even if values can only be calculated for one of ten scan lines, conclusions can still be drawn on individual quality characteristics for extremely poor quality codes. This procedure may result in the overall grade on the user interface being significantly poorer than the individual grades. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 206 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.8 Options In the dialog windows for the options, you make settings applicable to the entire device: For lighting which you cannot select directly by order number. For user authorizations For saving information for diagnostic purposes. Extra functions Lighting These settings are only required if you are connecting lighting which cannot be selected by its order number: In the image acquisition/control step in the Lighting group, select "Other (int.)" or "Other (ext.)" as lighting. The lighting parameters set here will be used. Figure 9-33 Options - "Lighting" tab SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 207 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface For calibrated verification Changing a parameter on this page or changing the lamp connected makes calibration of the reader invalid. Calibration must be repeated and saved codes must be saved again. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Security In this tab, the administrator specifies which user role is permitted to execute which tasks and, when necessary, changes the administrator password or the passwords of the users. Note Only an administrator can change authorizations The permissions can only be changed by the administrator. Figure 9-34 Options - "Security" tab SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 208 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface The reader allows different levels of access control for different users. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. Diag.&monitoring Under Options, in the "Diag.&monitoring" tab, you specify the information to be stored for diagnostic purposes. Figure 9-35 Options - "Diag.&monitoring" tab In the "Image" box of the "Logging" group box, you specify which images will be stored in which format on the reader. In "Report", you specify the format in which the diagnostics events will be stored on the reader. In the "Time base" group box, you specify whether the time stamp of the diagnostics events is supplied by the PC or by an SNTP server in the network. If you specify SNTP as the source, you will also need to specify the IP address of the server. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 209 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface In the "Monitoring" group box, you specify whether or not a live image is displayed in processing mode. In the "Persistence" group box, you specify which diagnostic information you want to store permanently on the EPROM. - If the "Save NOK image" check box is enabled, the image of the next NOK signal will be stored. If an image has already been stored, it will be overwritten when this function is selected. - If the "Save diag. entries" check box is selected, all diagnostics entries you specify in the input box from the time of enabling will be entered in the EPROM. Existing entries are deleted when you switch to On. If the diagnostics buffer in the EPROM reaches the number of permanently storable diagnostic data records, no further entries are made. In the "Character fonts" group box, you determine whether prototypes for the "Supervised training" function should be recorded in processing mode. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 210 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Extras You can specify the additional functions you want to use for image processing on the Options - "Extras" tab. Figure 9-36 Options - "Extras" tab Program sequence Note A non-existent/non-executable program number prevents processing You cannot use a program sequence for processing: * If the program sequence contains a program number which does not exist. * If the program sequence contains a program number which cannot be executed. "Program sequence" mode allows you to acquire and process several images at the same time with one trigger. 1. Select a program sequence number (between 1 and 15) in the "Program sequence" dropdown list. 2. Under "Contains the following programs", select the programs which are to be included in the program sequence. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 211 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Verification You can select whether quality grades are output as numbers (4 to 0) or letters (A to F without E). Scanner portal Used to implement scanner portal applications (Page 318). Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 212 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.9 Info The Information task consists of three sections: Statistics Diagnostics Device information Statistics This part of the dialog shows you the statistics for recognition of the codes/code sequences which are currently active. Note Quality statistics Verification errors are not recorded in the quality statistics. Figure 9-37 Info - "Statistics" tab In this part of the dialog, you will see statistical values on the reading of the codes and read quality. The meaning of the individual displays is explained in the online help that you can access with the "Help" button. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 213 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface If you have switched off "Code sequence" mode (see Options - " Extras"), information on the code currently used will be provided here. If you activated Code sequence mode, a drop-down list will be displayed. In the dropdown list, you can decide whether the statistics of the entire code sequence or the statistics of a specific code are displayed. If you simply want the statistics of the OK reads of a certain code, select the program number of the relevant sequence from the drop-down list. With this setting, the "*" symbol is displayed at several places. You can clear the statistics with the "Reset statistics" button if you have administration authorization (see Options - "Security" tab). Statistics are reset automatically if the program number is changed in processing mode. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 214 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Diagnostics In this part of the dialog, you can display, delete and save diagnostics images and diagnostics reports. Figure 9-38 Information - "Diagnostics" tab Images Under "Images", you can see the number of images currently in the image buffer. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all images in the image buffer. Clicking the "Open" button opens a Web page with all the images from the image buffer. Clicking on an image enlarges it. Clicking the "Save" button opens a Web page with all the images from the image buffer. You can save this Web page on your computer in various formats. Character fonts "Character fonts" shows you the number of prototypes currently in the diagnostic buffer. The prototypes are recorded with the "Supervised training" function. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all prototypes in the diagnostic buffer. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 215 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Data records The "Data records" group box shows you the number of diagnostics events currently in the event buffer. In "Content", you can use the check boxes to select the information you want to display about the diagnostics events in the buffer: Error Information on the occurrence and acknowledgment (manual or automatic) of errors Results Evaluation results Image Information on the image acquisition, for example exposure time, brightness States Mode change (change to RUN, ADJUST, Self-test, etc.) Control Changing control of the reader Diagnostics Changes that affect diagnostics, for example, changing the diagnostics options or fetching a time stamp from an SNTP server If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can store the events currently selected under "Content" as a CSV file. Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a Web page with all the events of the events buffer. You can save this Web page on your computer in various formats. Persistent data records Note Activating persistent data records The persistent data records option is activated, when necessary, in the "Diag.&monitoring" tab under Options. Clicking the "Reset" button deletes all the entries in the event buffer including the entries relating to temporary PROFINET I/O errors. Clicking the "Open & save" button opens a Web page with all the diagnostics entries saved permanently on the reader. You can save this Web page on your computer. If you click the "Save as CSV" button, a dialog opens in which you can save the diagnostics events permanently stored on the reader as a CSV file. Note Detailed description of parameters in the online help For a detailed description of the parameters and possible values, refer to the online help. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 216 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Device information This part of the dialog provides you with information on the reader, the firmware and the optional integrated internal lamp. Figure 9-39 Information - "Device information" tab SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 217 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.10 Manage The "Maintain" task provides the following options: Saving or restoring settings and programs. Inputting the VeriCode(R) license number. Resetting the reader to the original factory state. When necessary, running required firmware updates. Loading a customized CustomGUI to the reader or backing it up from the reader. Figure 9-40 Maintain SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 218 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Settings and programs With the "Save/restore" button, you open a Web page on which you can save the saved programs and parameter records or reload them to the reader. Firmware Note Control via automation system: DISA bit must not be set If you control the reader from an automation system, make sure that the DISA bit is not set during the firmware update. This prevents an automation system from switching the reader to RUN. "Incremental update..." button The "Incremental update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware. To do this, you require a vsz file. An incremental update is only possible to a version in which the version has only changed in the third digit compared with the previous version. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 219 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Example Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.0.1 is possible. Updating with a vsz file from firmware version V3.0.0 to V3.1.0 or V4.0.0 is not possible. "Full update..." button Note Full update: Saving all settings and programs During a full update, all settings and programs are lost: * Make sure that you save all settings and programs before running a full update. You will find more detailed information on running a firmware update in the online help and on the Web pages that open. The "Full update..." button opens a Web page where you can update the firmware. To do this, you require a bin file. Figure 9-41 Updating the firmware of the reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 220 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface 9.2.11 Stop This page is displayed when the reader is in "Stop"mode. Figure 9-42 Stop reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 221 Operator control and monitoring 9.2 Working with the user interface Error display If an error occurs, the STATE/SF LED will turn red and display: The corresponding error message The meaning of the error The options for eliminating the error Acknowledge the error by clicking the "Acknowledge" button. Figure 9-43 Error message SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 222 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages The HTML pages integrated on the reader provide the opportunity of obtaining important information from the reader and monitoring the recognition process in many environments. Benefits Independent of the operating system or the browser you are using. Does not require Java Runtime on the visualization device. Requires little memory and performance on the visualization device. Can be integrated easily in existing applications. Display normally available in 6 languages, language can be changed online. Available HTML pages Shows current device information on: Device reader revision level Firmware version PROFINET IO device name Network identification SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 223 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Live image display with links Figure 9-44 Live image display with links Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically updated. With the displayed links, you can call up other pages. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 224 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Live image display without links Figure 9-45 Live image display without links Displays the images acquired by the reader in adjustment mode or processing mode. If the visualization device provides Java script support, the displayed image is automatically updated. This page does not provide any links to other pages. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 225 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Last image Figure 9-46 Last image Purely display of the last recorded image without any further information and without automatic image updating. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 226 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Monitor Figure 9-47 Monitor Non-embedded display of the last image processed in processing mode with colored overlay showing the results of processing (ROIs and details view). Requires JavaScript support and Internet Explorer as of Version 8. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 227 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Diagnostic images Figure 9-48 Diagnostic images Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images buffered on the reader along with additional information. You specify which images are buffered and displayed in the adjustment support in the Options/Diag.&monitoring tab. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 228 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels) Figure 9-49 Extended diagnostic images (optimized for touch panels) Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostic images buffered on the reader along with additional information. You specify which images are buffered and displayed in the adjustment support in the Options/Diag.&monitoring tab. This page combines a large format image display with the most important additional information about the image such as the read result and display of the quality values. This page is particularly suitable when using touch panels. Navigation is made easier by the large area navigation symbols at the left edge. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 229 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Diagnostics recordings Figure 9-50 Diagnostics recordings Provides a dynamically created HTML page with which you can display diagnostics recordings buffered on the reader relating to errors that occurred, signal changes etc. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 230 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages Overview of available URLs Using the following URLs, you can open the pages described above in the language of your choice. Example of a URL: http://<IP address of reader>/peeklive.html Overview of the HTML pages for monitoring the reader Table 9- 12 English, Chinese, German Page English Chinese German Home page index_en.html index_zh.html index_de.html Adjustment (applet) adj_en.cgi adj_zh.cgi adj_de.cgi Diagnostic records *) diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 Diagnostic images diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 Extended diagnostics screens *) ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi Live Image with links peeklive.html peeklive_zh.html peeklive_de.html Live image without links *) epeeklive.html epeeklive.html epeeklive.html Last image live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi *) *) Monitoring *) *) These HTML pages are displayed only in English. Table 9- 13 Spanish, French, Italian Page Spanish French Italian Home page index_es.html index_fr.html index_it.html Adjustment (applet) adj_es.cgi adj_fr.cgi adj_it.cgi Diagnostic records *) diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 diagrecs.cgi?rg=65535 Diagnostic images *) diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 diagimgs.cgi?tn=1 Extended diagnostics screens *) ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi ediagimghtml.cgi Live Image with links peeklive_es.html peeklive_fr.html peeklive_it.html Live image without links epeeklive.html epeeklive.html Last image *) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) live.cgi?d=0 (d=0: not-down sampled, d=1 down sampled) Monitoring *) drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi drawresults.cgi *) *) *) epeeklive_it.html These HTML pages are displayed only in English. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 231 Operator control and monitoring 9.3 Monitoring via HTML pages SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 232 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 10 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) You can also control the reader from an automation system instead of with the user interface. The automation system controls the reader and outputs read results and verification results. Note Actions such as saving and changing programs using an automation system are only possible when the user interface is active if the "Take control" check box is not selected for the current user on the "Security" tab in the "Options" task. &RPPXQL FDWLRQ PRGXOH 6,0$7,&09 LQWHUIDFH $60 $60LQWHUIDFH $60 $60LQWHUIDFH 5)& $60LQWHUIDFH 5)& $60LQWHUIDFH 5)(,3 $60LQWHUIDFH )% ,GHQWSURILOH 352),1(7 ,GHQWSURILOH 352),1(7 )% 7&3,3 56 ','2 )% 96 FRPSDWLELOLW\ :LWKRXWGHGLFD WHG)% * Betrieb ohne Kommunikationsmodul uber Onboard PROFINET-IO des Lesegerates Figure 10-1 Overview of communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks Numerous interfaces are available for integration A variety of interfaces are available for integration into your automation system: Integration using a communication module and FB45 or Ident profile. Using an Ident profile via PROFINET IO without additional communication module. The FB79 provides a PROFINET IO interface that is compatible with the VS130-2 reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 233 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO Other available interfaces are: TCP/IP RS232 DI/DO This chapter describes the process connection options. 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO MAC address The reader has two MAC addresses. The MAC address printed on the housing is the interface MAC address. The port MAC address is the interface MAC address plus 1. Generic station description (GSD file) The properties of the PROFINET IO device SIMATIC MV440 or SIMATIC MV420 are stored in the supplied GSD file. If the SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 is not yet listed in the module catalog of HW Config in your STEP 7 version, add the reader with "Options Install GSD Files..." at this point. This requires the corresponding bitmap files "GSDML-002A-0B03-MV440.bmp" and "GSDML-002A-0B08-MV420.bmp" to be located in the same directory as the GSD file. Note GSD files and BMP file can be downloaded from the Internet If necessary, you can also download the two GSD files and the BMP file from the Internet at: Downloading the GSD files (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23379628/133100) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 234 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO The reader then appears in the module catalog under: PROFINET IO \ Ident Systems \ SIMATIC Code Reading Systems \ MV44x, or MV42x; see figure below: The reader detects the transmission speed of PROFINET automatically. PROFINET operates in 100 Mbps full duplex mode. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 235 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO To assign the device name for the reader, follow these steps: Step Activity 1 1. Open the properties window of the reader in HW Config. 2. Enter the device name. 3. Optional: In the "Identification" tab, enter the plant designation, location designation, installation date and additional information (I&M data records 1 to 3) 4. Save and compile the hardware configuration. 2 Inform the reader of the device name you have just assigned. There are three ways of doing this. Method 1: 1. In HW Config, select PLC Ethernet Assign Ethernet Address... 2. Click the "Browse" button. All the devices connected to the PNIO system are then displayed. Note: The reader must be in "PROFINET" IP mode; otherwise, it will not be displayed!). 3. Select the reader using its MAC address and identify it, if necessary, using the "Flash" button (the "LINK" LED on the Ethernet connector of the reader then flashes). 4. Enter the device name. 5. Click the "Assign Name" button. Method 2: Setup with the Primary Setup Tool, see Establishing a connection to the reader and starting the user interface (Page 133). Method 3: Assign and transfer the device name using the user interface, see "Connections", "Interfaces" tab, "PROFINET IO", "Device name" parameter. Note Reader does not support update times of less than 4 ms The reader does not support any update time shorter than 4 ms and cannot be set to update times lower than this. If you configure in STEP 7 V5.3 + SP1, the lowest possible update time therefore changes to 4 ms for all PROFINET IO devices of the relevant PROFINET IO system. Note When using a CPU 317-2 PN/DP, in the "Options" tab of the properties window of the PROFINET IO system (slot X2) you will need to select "Transmission Medium/Duplex" "Automatic Settings". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 236 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 10.1.1 Configuration for using the Ident profile Note Using the Ident profile with a communication module To use the Ident profile with a communication module, follow the description in Integration via communication module (ASM) (Page 240). To use the Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB) without a communication module, select "Ident profile" in the HW Config catalog. - The base addresses of the In/Out section must be identical and be within in the process image of OB1 ("OB1-PI"). Note that input and output addresses are preset to "256" for the integration of the reader. The size of the process image is set to "256" (0 to 255) for many controllers. Therefore, you must either adjust the size of the process image or the input and output addresses of the reader. - The "ID" input parameter of the Ident profile block must match the addresses accordingly. The base address is 256 in the configuration example (see figure). Figure 10-2 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader configured for use of the Ident profile (screenshot for SIMATIC MV420: similar) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 237 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 10.1.2 Configuration for using the FB 79 "FB79" must be selected in HW Config catalog to use the FB 79 or the associated PROFINET IO interface without a function block. Figure 10-3 HW Config with SIMATIC MV440 reader (screenshot for SIMATIC MV420 similar) In the configuration example, the control byte of the reader was placed at output address 0 and the status byte at input address 0 of the CPU (slot 1). If these addresses are located in the process image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), then you can work here using process image access (for example "A I0.6" or "S Q0.1"). If this is not the case, you will have to work with direct I/O access (for example, "L PIB 0"). The start of the 16-word long consistent communications area of the reader is placed at input address 256 and output address 256 (slot 2). If these addresses are located in the process image of OB1 (process image partition "OB1-PI"), you can work with process image access in OB1 (for example "L IW 2", "T QB 1") without losing consistency. (This only applies to CPUs that transfer consistent user data via the process image.) If these addresses, on the other hand, are not located in the process image of OB1, you will have to access the communications area of the reader using SFCs 14 "DPRD_DAT" and 15 "DPWR_DAT" to ensure consistency. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 238 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.1 Integration via Onboard PROFINET IO 10.1.3 Concept of device replacement Note Settings/programs of the reader being replaced as an XML file For simple device replacement, you save the settings and programs of the reader you are replacing as an XML file. Note The topology of the system must be correctly configured To be able to replace the device without an exchangeable medium, the topology of the system must be correctly configured. Use the topology editor for this. Select "Support device replacement without exchangeable medium" For a simple device replacement, select the PROFINET functionality "Support device replacement without exchangeable medium": With this setting, the new reader receives its device name directly from the IO controller. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighborhood relations detected by the IO devices. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 239 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) Replacing the device: Procedure 1. Replace the reader with a new reader with the factory settings. 2. Wait until the new reader is automatically assigned the IP address of the device that was replaced. 3. Start of the adjustment support using this IP address in the browser. 4. Start to restore the settings from the saved XML parameter file using the adjustment support. Make sure that the options "TCP/IP settings" and "PROFINET IO settings" are selected. 5. Wait until the parameters have been restored. 6. Following the automatic restart, the reader is ready for operation. 10.2 Integration via communication module (ASM) The reader supports a subset of MOBY commands. The reader can be integrated via the RS 422 interface as a write/read device (compatible with RF300) using a communication module (ASM). The hardware integration of the communication modules is described in the operating instructions of the respective device. The following parameters must be set for the configuration of the communication module: Table 10- 1 Configuration parameters Parameter Value USER_Mode FB45 / FC45 RFID standard profile MOBY_Mode MOBY U / D/ RF300 normal addressing Baud rate SLG RF300 / MOBY U / D * 19.2 kbaud * 57.6 kbaud * 115.2 kbaud Diagnostics with diagnostics messages none Note Use Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB). The selection must be identical to the configuration of the reader. Standard diagnostics. The diagnostics of the reader uses a separate mechanism. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 240 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile This chapter describes a process connection using the FB45 or Ident profile (PIB_1KB, PIB_16KB, PIB_32KB): With communication module Without communication module (Ident profile only) For an overview of the usable communication modules, see Figure 10-1 Overview of communication modules, MV400 interfaces and function blocks (Page 233) The functionality described in Functional description (Page 25) is provided by the FB45 and Ident profile. Note Understanding of MOBY system architecture/MOBY commands required To understand the following description, you require knowledge of: * MOBY system architecture * MOBY commands * Ident profile system architecture and Ident profile commands. You will find descriptions of the software in Industry online support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/). See also Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) (Page 233) 10.3.1 Setting parameters of FB45 For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of FB45, refer to the relevant FB45 Function Manual (J31069-D0166-U001-A2-0018). The following blocks are required in the S7 project: "MOBY FB" (FB45) with instance DB. "MOBY Param": Parameter data block occupied by UDT10 or UDT11 (English or German). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB45. "MOBY CMD": Command data block occupied by UDT20 or UDT21 (English or German). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB47. "Data DB": A data block for result or job data (command data area). In the S7 sample program "MOBY FB45", this is DB48. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 241 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Input parameters The variables should be assigned as follows: Variable Value/description ASM_address To match the start address in HW Config ASM_channel 1 or 2, depending on the connection to the ASM command_DB_number Number of the "MOBY CMD" data block command_DB_address Start address of the command in "MOBY_CMD" MDS_control B#16#1 ECC_mode FALSE RESET_long TRUE MOBY_mode B#16#5 scanning_time B#16#0 option_1 B#16#2 distance_limiting B#16#0 multitag B#16#1 field_ON_control B#16#0 field_ON_time B#16#0: init_run without program selection, B#16#1 ... B#16#15: Number of the program to be started (init_run with program selection) reserved0 B#16#0 cancel Not supported command_start TRUE = start of a command repeat_command FALSE, not supported init_run For information on initializing the ASM, refer to the FB45 function manual; for information on acknowledging a group error of the reader, refer to chapter Group errors (Page 267). ASM_failure Refer to the description in the FB45 Function Manual. Output parameters The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of FB45: Variable Description ANZ_MDS_present No significance. number_MDS Refer to the description in chapter Status displays of the MV reader (Page 245) ANZ_cancel Not supported. ANZ_ECC Not supported. LR_bat Not supported. Battery_low Not supported. error_MOBY Refer to the description in chapter Result evaluation of a command (Page 264) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 242 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.2 Configuring the Ident profile (RFID standard profile) For a detailed description of the parameter assignment and commissioning of the RFID standard profile FB, refer to the relevant RFID function manual (J31069-D0179-U001-A10018). The following blocks are required in the S7 project: "RFID standard profile FB" (FB101, FB116 or FB132 depending on the length of the data to be processed) "Instance DB RFID standard profile", field that can hold 10 commands. A command is a complex variable of the type "PIB_COMMAND" RXBUF and TXBUF for result or job data (command data area). Input parameters The following input parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of the RFID standard profile: Variable Value/description INIT For information on initializing the ASM or on acknowledging a group error of the reader, refer to chapter Group errors (Page 267). Output parameters The following output parameters have a different meaning from the description in the function manual of the RFID standard profile: Variable Value/description RPTACT Not supported TPC No significance TP No significance UIN0-1 See description Status displays of the MV reader (Page 245) Initialization During initialization (INIT), the Ident profile automatically executes the "WRITE-CONFIG" command (see function manual for RFID Standard Profile, RFID Systems J31069-D0179U001-A2-0018). The parameter values of the "WRITE-CONFIG" command depend on whether the Ident profile is used with or without a communication module. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 243 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile WRITE-CONFIG Table 10- 2 Command parameter Variable Value Config 3 Length 16 Table 10- 3 Command data appendix Variable Value Description Byte 1 4 Length of the subsequent sub-parameter in hex, here 4. Bytes 2 to 5 0 Byte 6 10 Byte 7 0 Byte 8 0 Byte 9 0 Length of the subsequent sub-parameter in hex, here 16. Byte 10 0x25 Setting of the MOBY operating mode. Byte 11 2 Option Byte 12 0 Byte 13 0 Byte 14 1 Byte 15 0 Byte 16 0: INIT without program selection, 1 ... 15: Number of the program to be started (INIT with program selection) Table 10- 4 Variable Number of MDS Command parameter Value Config 1 Length 0 (no data appendix) The command parameters are possible (onboard PROFINET IO) only if no communication module is used. Corresponds to the INIT without program selection. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 244 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3 Control with MV commands via FB 45 or Ident profile The reader is controlled by the MOBY commands "WRITE" and "READ" or by the Ident profile commands "PHYSICAL-WRITE" and "PHYSICAL-READ". Chaining of commands is not supported. An RFID system typically has a linear memory area for each RFID tag from which data can be read or to which data can be written. With a reader, the address space (in this case, purely virtual) is used to map certain MV commands (Machine Vision commands). In addition to this, the data "written", for example, to a certain address has a defined semantic meaning. This chapter explains which address can be written to and which address can be read from to achieve a certain response from the reader. The semantic meaning of the read data or data to be written is also explained. 10.3.3.1 Status displays of the MV reader Note Startup of the code reader with FB 45 or Ident profile You need to ensure the following after power "ON" when using FB 45 or the Ident profile (with or without communication module) for the startup of the the code reader: 1. Set a startup flag in OB100 of the controller. 2. If the startup flag is set, you need to repeat the initialization ("init_run" or "INIT" command) until positive acknowledgment is received. 3. Then, check the status bits (IN_OP, RDY) to verify the preconditions for further commands. 4. To generate an error in the automation system, additionally monitor the maximum wait time for positive acknowledgment of the initialization and expected status bit values. The status bits IN_OP (in operation) and RDY (ready) of the reader indicate whether or not the device has a group error or is in processing mode or STOP mode. Depending on the status of the reader, various MV commands are permitted (see chapter Preconditions for the commands (Page 265)) or an acknowledgement of the error (see Group errors (Page 267)) required before the next MV command can be sent. If the IN_OP bit is not set, there is a group error that must be acknowledged before continued operation is possible. The acknowledgement mechanism via the interface module is explained in chapter WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 248). The status display is only valid after initialization has been successfully performed ("MOBY Param".init_run bit in FB45 or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit with the Ident profile). In addition to the error output bytes of FB45 or of the Ident profile block, these bits must always be queried before an MV command is sent. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 245 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 10- 5 FB45 Bit 3 Output byte "number_MDS" ("MOBY Param" DB) Meaning Table 10- 6 Bit 1 These two bits are interpreted as an unsigned value (bit 2 is the less significant bit) that represents the number of available decoded codes. If the value = 3, three or more decoded codes are available. Corresponds to RDY bit of the reader Bit 0 Corresponds to IN_OP bit of the reader Ident profile Output bit ("Instance DB RFID standard profile") Meaning Bit 2 UIN3 UIN2 UIN1 These two bits are interpreted as an unsigned value (bit 2 is the less significant bit) that represents the number of available decoded codes. If the value = 3, three or more decoded codes are available. Corresponds to RDY bit of the reader UIN0 Corresponds to IN_OP bit of the reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 246 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.2 Initialization To perform the the initialization (FB45: init_run, Ident profile: INIT), you have the choice between an initialization without program selection and initialization with program selection. To react to a change in the operating mode and to check the preconditions to be fulfilled (Preconditions for the commands (Page 265)): Monitor the operating mode state of the reader regardless of the initialization method selected by the automation system (Status displays of the MV reader (Page 245)). Initialization without program selection Initialization without program selection enables: Initialization after startup - After the self-test, the reader changes to the operating mode that it was in prior to shutdown. - Initialization is possible during the self-test. You need to determine the operating mode using the status display (Status displays of the MV reader (Page 245)). Identification of pending error (Group errors (Page 267)) Reset of pending error Initialization with program selection Initialization with program selection enables: Initialization after startup - After the self-test, the reader switches to processing mode with the selected program number. - Initialization during self-test is not possible (negative acknowledgment is received). Reset of pending error with the subsequent start of the selected program. If the selected program does not exist, the initialization is acknowledged negatively. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 247 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.3 WRITE commands/MV command interface Supported MV commands With the MOBY WRITE commands, you can send various MV commands (Machine Vision commands). An MV command is always a write command to the address 0x0000 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0) with a length depending on the command ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length). The first byte in the command data area codes the relevant MV command and determines the meaning of any bytes that follow. The following commands are supported and coded as follows: MV command Command identifier Program change (write program number) 0x01 Activate read program number once 0x02 Write match string 0x03 Enable read match string once 0x04 Set DISA bit 0x05 Reset DISA bit 0x06 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) 0x07 Set digital out 0x08 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 248 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Program change (write program number) To change programs, a WRITE command is sent with the data shown in the following table. If it is possible to change to the program specified in the job, there will be a positive response to the WRITE command, otherwise the response is negative. Before the program is changed, the DISA bit is set automatically on the reader and is reset again after the program change. If the DISA bit was set manually prior to the program change, it will remain set. The WRITE command must set the length 0x2 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_ COMMAND".Length = 0x2), otherwise the command will be acknowledged negatively. If an attempt is made to change to an unsaved program or a program number > 0xF, the command will also be denied and acknowledged negatively. Table 10- 7 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 01 - 2 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 8 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x02 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 9 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x01 "Program change" command identifier 0x0001 0x00 - 0x0F Number of the program SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 249 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read program number The "Read program number" command is used to prepare reading of the current program number. The MV command itself does not perform the actual read. For this reason, the data of the WRITE command contains only the MV command itself. The user sends the MV command "Read program number" with the WRITE command and waits for a positive response. A READ command is then used to read out the actual program number, see also READ commands (Page 260). The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 10- 10 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 11 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 12 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x02 "Read program number" command identifier SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 250 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Match string Note Sent match string takes effect immediately A sent match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition. * Therefore, ensure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filter", the source "Filter with match text" or "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification. The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type at pos.". Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in adjustment support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. Command: Write match string This MV command allows the match string of the program currently loaded (nonpersistent) to be overwritten. Executing this command is possible only when the reader is in processing mode. If the reader exits processing mode, for example by changing to STOP mode or to the group error status, the overwritten match string is discarded. This also applies to a program change. The structure of the command data area is outlined in the following table. The total length of the data to be written is the overall length of the match string + 3 bytes for the length and the command identifier ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = n + 3 ). If it is possible to apply the new match string for the current program, the command will be acknowledged positively. If the match string cannot be overwritten, an extra entry is made in the diagnostic data. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 251 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 10- 13 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] 01 - Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Match string length +3 Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 14 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length Match string length + 3 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 15 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x03 Command identifier "Write match string" 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Match string length high byte 0x0002 0x00-0xFF Match string length low byte 0x0003 1. character of the match string ... ... n+2 (n-1)th character of the match string n+3 nth character of the match string SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 252 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read match string The "Read match string" MV command is used to prepare reading of the match string. The actual read is not executed with the WRITE command. The command data area of the WRITE command contains only the command identifier. Send the "Read match string" command with the WRITE command and wait for the positive response. Then read out the actual string with a READ command. The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 10- 16 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 17 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 18 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x04 Command identifier "Read match string" SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 253 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile DISA bit Command: Set DISA bit The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command identifier "Set DISA bit". If the DISA bit of the reader is set, the command is acknowledged positively. If the DISA bit is already set, it remains set. The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 10- 19 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 20 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 21 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x05 Command identifier "Set DISA bit". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 254 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Reset DISA bit The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command simply contains the command identifier "Reset DISA bit". If the DISA bit of the reader is reset, the command is acknowledged positively. If it was already reset, this command has no effect but is nevertheless positively acknowledged. The WRITE command must specify a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 0x1), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 10- 22 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dez] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dez] DAT_DB_address [dez] 01 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 23 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 24 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x06 Command identifier "Reset DISA bit". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 255 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) NOTICE Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR A match string can only be sent: If the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". If the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at pos." syntax. Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in adjustment support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. Writing command data The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains an XMATCH header and the XMATCH user data. The command is acknowledged positively if the structure of the header and user data is correct. The WRITE command must specify the total length of the XMATCH user data + 4, otherwise a negative response will be sent. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 256 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 10- 25 Moby_CMD Command Sub_ Length Address_ [hex] Command [dez] MDS [hex] Total length of the XMATCH user data + 4 0 [hex] 01 - DAT_DB_num ber DAT_DB_addr ess [dez] [dez] Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 26 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length Total length of the XMATCH user data + 4 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 27 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x07 Command identifier XMATCH 0x0001 0x00 Reserved 0x0002 See chapter "Control via TCP/IP XMATCH user data and RS232" (Page 301) ... 0xN SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 257 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Set digital out Writing command data The command data to be "written" in the WRITE command contains the command identifier and six parameters. With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set via an automation system. These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using adjustment support. Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records. If the command contains an invalid parameter, a negative acknowledgement is sent. The WRITE command must specify a length of "0x7" ("MOBY_CMD Length" or "PIB_COMMAND Length" = 0x7), otherwise a negative response will be sent. Table 10- 28 Moby_CMD Command Sub_ Length Address_ [hex] Command [dez] MDS [hex] 7 0 [hex] 01 - DAT_DB_num ber DAT_DB_addr ess [dez] [dez] Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) Pointer to the user data to be sent to the reader. Table 10- 29 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x71 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x07 StartAddress 0x00 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 258 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 10- 30 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x08 Command identifier "Set digital out". 0x0001 0x1-0x4 Number of the logical external signal. Corresponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4". 0x0002 0x0-0x2 0x0003 0x0004 0x1-0x7 0x0-0x5 Level of the signal * 0x0: Set level statically to "low". * 0x1: Set level statically to "high". * 0x2: Set level for configured pulse time to "high". Link type * 0x1: Logical "OR" * 0x2: Logical "AND" * 0x3: Logical "Exclusive OR" * 0x4: no link * 0x5: Logical "OR not" * 0x6: Logical "AND not" * 0x7: Logical "Exclusive OR not" Logical signal linked to. If the link type is 0x4, the parameter has no significance. * 0x0: Logical signal "IN_OP" * 0x1: Logical signal "TRD" * 0x2: Logical signal "RDY" * 0x3: Logical signal "READ" * 0x4: Logical signal "MATCH" * 0x5: Logical signal "NOK" 0x0005 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compatibility. 0x0006 0x0 Reserved, must be 0x0 to retain upwards compatibility. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 259 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.4 READ commands The following commands are supported: MV command Trigger and read result string Read result string Read program number Read match string Command: Trigger and read result string To activate a trigger and read the result string, you will need to send a READ command starting at address 0x0000. The following table shows the content of the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF) after fully processing the READ command (assuming that 0x0000 was selected as the start address for the read). The total length of the result string is stored at the (virtual) addresses 0x0000 and 0x0001. If the result string is longer than the number of characters to be read ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length), the character string is truncated at the back. If the result string is shorter than the number of characters to be read, the string is padded with the value 0x00. You can also configure the format text so that the result bits "READ", "MATCH", "N_OK" are inserted in the string. If you do not know of the total length of the result string, send a READ command starting at address 0x0002 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 2). You can also start to read from any start address, for example when the result string is only relevant starting at the 10th character in the code. Table 10- 31 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - length of the result string 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) FB45 stores the read result data here. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 260 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Table 10- 32 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length length of the result string StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 33 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x00-0xFF Length of the entire result string (more significant byte) 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the result string (less significant byte) 0x0002 1st character of the result string 0x0003 2nd character of the result string ... ... (n + 1) (n-1)th character of the result string (n + 2) nth character of the result string Command: Read result string Using the same mechanism as "Read trigger + result string", it is possible to read out the decoded string via ASM. If the trigger source selected in the adjustment support is not "ASM", the READ command does not activate a trigger but simply returns the result of the decoding. If a result is already available, this is returned. If there is not yet a result string available, the system waits until a result string is available. After processing the command, the result string is available in the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF). You can abort processing of the command by setting the "MOBY Param".init_run (FB45) or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".INIT bit (RFID standard profile). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 261 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read program number To have the current program number returned when a READ command is received, the MV command "Read program number" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before, see WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 248). The READ command must specify the start address 0x0000 and a length of 0x1 ("MOBY_CMD".address_MDS or "PIB_COMMAND".StartAddress = 0, "MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length = 1). The byte read at address 0x0000 contains the number of the program currently selected and is stored in the command data area specified in the command ("MOBY_CMD".DAT_DB_number or "instance DB-RFID standard profile".RXREF) after the command is processed. Table 10- 34 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - 1 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) FB45 stores the read result data here. Table 10- 35 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length 0x01 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 36 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x0 - 0xF Current program number SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 262 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Command: Read match string To have the current match string returned when the READ command is received, the MV command "Read match string" (WRITE command) must be sent immediately before, see WRITE commands/MV command interface (Page 248). After processing the READ command, the following data is available in the command data area: If the length of the data to be read ("MOBY_CMD".length or "PIB_COMMAND".Length) is not n + 2 bytes (n = total length of the match string) the match string is truncated or the command data area is padded with 0x00. Table 10- 37 Moby_CMD Command [hex] Sub_ Command [hex] Length [dec] Address_ MDS [hex] DAT_DB_number [dec] DAT_DB_address [dec] 02 - total length of the match string +2 0 Number of the data DB (for example 48) Pointer to the start word (for example 0) FB45 stores the read result data here. Table 10- 38 PIB_COMMAND Parameter Value CMD 0x70 OffsetBuffer 0x00 UID 0x00 Length total length of the match string + 2 StartAddress 0x00 Table 10- 39 Command data area (FB45: Data DB, RFID standard profile: TXBUF or RXBUF) Address Value Meaning 0x0000 0x0 - 0xF Length of the total match string (more significant byte) 0x0001 0x00-0xFF Length of the total match string (less significant byte) 0x0002 1st character of the match string ... ... n+2 nth character of the match string SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 263 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.5 Result evaluation of a command The result of the command execution appears as follows: Through the "ready" bit in the command and status word "BEST" and the output bytes "error_MOBY", "error_FB" and "error_BUS" ("MOBY Param"). Through the output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). In addition to the description in the relevant function manuals of FB45 and the RFID standard profile, the following values have a specific meaning for the reader: FB45: Ident profile STATUS Meaning Error_MOBY Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 0x05 0xE6 0xFE 0x01 Command not permitted. At least one precondition is not permitted: See the chapter "Preconditions for the commands" (Page 265) 0x0D 0xE1 0xFE 0x03 Bad parameter in MV command Command is incorrectly structured, for example: * The specified address for a WRITE command is not 0x0000. * Program change MV command - length of the data to be written > 0x1. - Program number transferred is > 0xF. Program number transferred is not saved. 0x15 0xE6 0xFE 0x03 Initialization with program selection (init_run/INIT) is not possible: * Program number transferred is not saved. * Reader is still in self-test. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 264 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.6 Command Preconditions for the commands Trigger source Result (binary) Result string Control DISA No group error Processi Stop mode ng mode Program change (write program number) ASM YES YES YES Read program number ASM YES Write match string ASM YES YES NO Read match string ASM YES YES NO Set DISA bit ASM YES Reset DISA bit ASM YES XMATCH1) ~ ~ ~ ASM ~ YES YES NO Set digital out1) ~ ~ ~ ASM ~ ~ ~ ~ Read result ASM YES YES NO Trigger + read result string ASM ASM YES YES NO Acknowledge group error ASM NO NO NO 1) Not available on SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Selection is unimportant. YES State must be satisfied. NO State is not permitted. ASM If the "PROFINET IP (Ident profile)" mode is set, you must select PROFINET IO; otherwise, select ASM. If you want to send a command, make sure that the selection criteria are met according to the table above. The columns "Trigger source", "Result", "Result string" and "Control" correspond to the selection in the user interface (Connections Integration Connection). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 265 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile As a general rule, "ASM" must be selected for at least one option so that the reader is accessible via the RS-422 interface. Note The following applies to all commands * The state of the DISA bit is irrelevant * There is no group error. If there is nevertheless a group error, first acknowledge the error. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 266 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile 10.3.3.7 Group errors Identifying and acknowledging group errors If the "IN_OP" status bit is not set and the status display is valid, there is a group error. Identifying and acknowledging this group error involves two stages. The procedure is as described below. Identifying the current group error Note Using initialization without program selection Only possible when using program selection without initialization: see Initialization (Page 247). Set the "MOBY Param".init_run (FB45) or "instance DB RFID standard profile.INIT" (RFID standard profile) bit. A value identifying the group error is now present in the output byte "error_MOBY" ("MOBY Param") or output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). You can find a list of possible group errors and the corresponding error codes in chapter Alarm, fault and system messages (Page 333). As a general rule: If an "init_run" or "INIT" is executed and the "IN_OP" status bit is not set afterwards, the reader is in the group error status. To identify the error, use the list provided in chapter Alarm, fault and system messages (Page 333). Do not use the description in the function manual of FB45 or RFID standard profile. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 267 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.3 Control with FB 45 and Ident profile Acknowledging the current group error 1. Once you have identified the group error, acknowledge this error by setting the "init_run" ("MOBY Param") or "INIT" ("instance DB RFID standard profile") bit again. After the group error has been acknowledged, the reader returns to processing mode. To change to processing mode, the DISA bit is set automatically and reset again after the status change. If the DISA bit was set manually previously, it remains set after the status change. 2. Now set the corresponding status bits "IN_OP" and "RDY". The description given in the chapter Result evaluation of a command (Page 264) applies to the value of the output byte "error_MOBY" ("MOBY Param") or the output double word "STATUS" ("instance DB RFID standard profile"). To acknowledge a group error via ASM or PROFINET IO: "ASM" or "PROFINET IO" must be configured as the controller in the adjustment support (Connections Integration Connection). Note Errors can be acknowledged via initialization with program selection If the cause of error does not need to be identified: Acknowledge the error with program selection via the initialization (Initialization (Page 247)). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 268 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 10.4 Control with FB79 Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO The following figure shows the reader interfaces relevant for data transmission via PROFINET IO (FB79). 5HDGHU '3PDVWHU,2FRQWUROOHU F\FOLF &RQWUROE\WH 6WDWXVE\WH 8VHUGDWD LQWHUIDFH 6HQG E\WHV 8VHUGDWD LQWHUIDFH 5HFHLYH E\WHV Figure 10-4 Principle of data transmission via PROFINET IO (FB79) Note Bytes 1 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface are relevant. Bytes 1 to 4 of the "Receive" user data interface are relevant. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 269 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 10.4.1 Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO Control byte Bit no. Corresponds to signal Function 0 DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and program saving, error acknowledgment, starting the reader 1 SEL0 Select 0: Program selection bit 0 2 SEL1 Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when TRN=1) 3 SEL2 Select 2: Program selection bit 2 4 SEL3 Select 3: Program selection bit 3 5 TRN Save program: Saves new program. 6 TRG Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge. 7 RES Reset: Reset error. Note The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective only when DISA=1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 270 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Status byte Bit no. Corresponds to signal Function 0 IN_OP In operation: 1 TRD * 0 = error message is displayed. * 1 = reader functioning, no error Program saved: * * 2 RDY In run: - 0 = Selected program has not been saved. - 1 = Selected program has been saved. When saving program (TRN=1) - 0 = Save program active - 1 = acknowledgment signal (RDY=0) Ready: * 0 = startup of reader or reader in stop * 1 = reader in run 3 READ Processing result: Code was localized and decoded. 4 MATCH Processing result: Code matches the trained code. 5 N_OK Code was not legible. 6 - Reserved 7 - Reserved Note Writing the control byte and reading and evaluating the status byte must be performed in the same way as in the time diagrams shown in the description of how to select modes. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 271 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 "Send" user data interface Byte no. Meaning 0 Reserved 1 Consecutive number of the data packet to be transferred to the I/O controller. 2 Total net length of the data to be transferred in bytes in STEP 7 format. 3 4 Data ID of the supplied data 5 1. user data byte ... ... 31 27. user data byte Note The "data ID of the supplied data" defines the data transferred. The coding matches byte 4 of the "Receive" user data interface. With a read job on the "Receive" user data interface, the ID of the data currently being transferred is entered here. "Receive" user data interface Byte no. Meaning 0 Reserved 1 Consecutive number of the current data packet received correctly by the I/O controller 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Data ID of the requested data. 5 Reserved ... ... 31 Reserved The "data ID of the requested data" defines the data to be read. The data ID can have the following values: Note * The code qualities are output correctly only when job = verification to 16022 is set. Otherwise the quality codes are not calculated when the code is read and cannot be output. * Use the definition of the "Format string" on the "Result" tab (result step) under "Programs" to output the quality values when another type of verification is selected. The quality values are then output according to the parameter settings along with the read result. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 272 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 ID (B#16#) Meaning 09 * User data byte 1: Outputs the program number selected on the reader. * User data byte 2: If the DISA bit is set, the display indicates whether a user is logged on via the user interface who has the right to overrule the DISA signal: 00H: "Take control" is activated, 01H: "Take control" is deactivated. 81 Result string 82 Quality parameters 83 Quality parameters as absolute values and result string 84 Quality parameters in classes 85 Quality parameters in classes and result string 86 Quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics 87 Quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and result string 88 Position of the data matrix code 89 Position and result string 8A Position and absolute quality characteristics 8B Position, quality characteristics as absolute values and result string 8C Position and quality characteristics in classes 8D Position, quality characteristics in classes and result string 8E Position, quality characteristics in classes and absolute quality characteristics 8F Position, quality characteristics in classes, absolute quality characteristics and result string Note * If no data ID is entered, the processing takes place but no data is transferred. * When the data ID is B#16#09, no trigger is necessary. The following table specifies what content and which data types are returned when the data ID contains the position or the quality characteristics. The order of the code properties in the table is identical to the order of the code properties in the data packet. If applicable, the result string is returned after the code properties. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 273 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Data to be read Position of the data matrix code Note: Viewing angle is only output for DMC quality = ambitious Absolute quality characteristics Quality parameters as classes consists of ... Data type of each component INT * X position * Y position * Roll angle * Viewing angle * Symbol contrast * Print growth * Axial non-uniformity * Unused error correction * Symbol contrast * Print growth * Axial non-uniformity * Unused error correction * Overall grade REAL CHAR Note If the data to be read contains the absolute quality characteristics, remember that the value of the "Swap" parameter (in the user interface in Connections Interfaces in PROFINET IO) must be taken into account. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 274 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 10.4.2 Sample program for data exchange when code length <= 27 bytes Below, you will find a sample program for data exchange when the code length is a maximum of 27 bytes. Note The sample program can only run on the following S7-CPUs: * On a CPU 318 and the S7-400-CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0 * On S7-300 CPUs with MMC On all other S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the two user data interfaces. Explanation of the program Only the pure result string with data ID B#16#81 is output. The I/O controller does not check how many bytes the reader has returned but always reads 27 bytes. The I/O controller does not monitor anything. The start of the "Send" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image input. The start of the "Receive" user data interface is at address 4 of the process image of the outputs. To ensure the consistency over the entire area of 32 bytes, there must be no update of the process image during the program shown here. The user data is stored in data block DB17 starting at byte 4. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 275 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 STL program //Enter data ID (in principle only necessary in the first cycle) L B#16#81 T QB 8 // Only result string // Check number of data packet for 1 L IB 5 // Number of data packet from reader L 1 <> I // If number does not equal 1 JC m001 // ... then there is not yet any user data // Read user data from reader L ID 9 // Read first 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 4 // Store in DB L ID 13 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 8 // Store in DB L ID 17 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 12 // Store in DB L ID 21 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 16 // Store in DB L ID 25 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 20 // Store in DB L ID 29 // Read next 4 bytes of user data T DB17.DBD 24 // Store in DB L IW 33 // Read second last 2 bytes of user data T DB17.DBW 28 // Store in DB L IB 35 // Read last byte of user data T DB17.DBB 30 / // Store in DB // Acknowledge with no. of data packet m001: L IB 5 // Number of data packet T QB 5 // Send as acknowledgment to reader BEU SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 276 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 10.4.3 Programming data fragmentation Handshaking The following sections introduce a handshaking procedure that ensures the consistency of all the data transferred from the reader to the I/O controller regardless of any configured consistency mechanisms in PROFINET. This procedure must be used with every data transfer, even if the transfer only consists of one data block, for example when reading out the program number selected on the reader. Remember that you need to enter the required data ID in byte 4 of the "Receive" user data interface. Note Handshaking can only run on the following S7 CPUs Handshaking using the method described here is only possible on the following S7-CPUs: * On a CPU 318 and the S7-400 CPUs as of firmware version V3.0.0 * On S7-300 CPUs with MMC On all other S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs, you must use SFCs 14 and 15 for all access to the two user data interfaces. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 277 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Step Activity in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller 1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte has the value 0, there is no new data available. If it has the value 1, go to step 2. 2 The value 1 in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface has the following meaning: The reader has started data transfer. Read out the net total length of the data to be transferred from bytes 2 and 3 of the "Send" user data interface and the user data of the 1st data packet from bytes 5 to 31. 3 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 1st data packet by writing the value 1 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the value 1, it fills bytes 5 to 31 of the "Send" user data interface with the user data of the 2nd data packet and enters the number of this data packet (in this case 2) in byte 1. 4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as this byte contains the number of the previously transferred data packet (1), there is no new data available. As soon as byte 1 has the value 2 (number of the next data packet), go to step 5. 5 Read the user data of the 2nd data packet from bytes 5 to 31. 6 Acknowledge correct receipt of the 2nd data packet by writing the value 2 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. ... ... Last - 4 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As long as byte 1 contains the number of the second last data packet, the data of the last data packet is not yet available. As soon as byte 1 contains the number of the last data packet, go to the next step. Last - 3 Read the user data of the last data packet from bytes 5 to 31. Last - 2 Acknowledge receipt of the last data packet by writing the number of the last data packet to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. The reader scans byte 1 of the " Receive" user data interface cyclically. As soon as it reads the number of the last data packet, it writes the value 0 to bytes 2 and 3 of the user data interface and also to byte 1. The value 0 in byte 1 signals the end of data transfer to the I/O controller. Last -1 Scan byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface cyclically. As soon as you read the value 0, go to the last step. Last Acknowledge correct receipt of all the data by writing the value 0 to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 278 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Reaction to disruptions, timeouts and errors The reader performs the following monitoring functions: The time between the arrival of two acknowledgements of the I/O controller is monitored for the value configured in the Connections Interfaces PROFINET IO Time limit window. The correct order of the data packets acknowledged by the I/O controller is monitored. If an error occurs, the reader enters B#16#FF in byte 1 of the "Send" user data interface which causes the current data transfer to abort. Siemens recommends that you implement the following monitoring functions in the user program of the I/O controller. Monitor the time between the arrival of two consecutive data packets. Monitor the correct order of the data packets sent by the reader. Check whether the total length of the user data actually transferred matches the net total length indicated by the reader at the beginning of the data transfer. If an error occurs, you can abort the current data transfer by writing B#16#FF to byte 1 of the "Receive" user data interface. 10.4.4 Function block 79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" To control the functions of the reader, there is a function block FB79 for PROFINET IO operations. In addition to the SIMATIC S7 system mechanisms for integrating the reader in a PROFINET IO environment, FB79 makes the software integration in control programs easier. Note * The description of the support provided by FB79 and the associated user data interface is mainly to retain compatibility with the VS130-2 reader. * The integration design with the highest performance is based on the Ident profile with or without a communication module. Siemens recommends the use of this concept for new plants. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 279 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Description You will need to process the following bits of the control byte outside the FB: TRG (Trigger): Start processing RES (Reset): Acknowledge an error (refer to the error messages) The FB monitors only the data exchange between the reader and the controller, in other words, the DONE parameter provides no information on the actual read result. To obtain a good/bad evaluation, you will need to evaluate the following result bits of the status byte: READ MATCH NOK The following jobs are possible Cancel current job Select program Save a program Output result strings Output the position of the code Output the quality characteristics of the currently read code Output the number of the currently selected program Output the current mode of the reader Reset the DISA control signal Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader and its parameter settings. Which job can execute in which status of the reader is described further below. With almost all jobs, FB79 sets the DISA control signal on the reader to TRUE. This is intended to prevent the reader being controlled from an HMI device at the same time. The following four jobs are exceptions: Reset the DISA control signal Cancel current job. The FB does not change DISA with this. Output the number of the currently selected program. The FB does not change DISA with this. Output the current mode of the reader. The FB does not change DISA with this. When a new job is started, the output parameters are reset. Note Multiple FB79 calls with the same instance are not permitted Multiple FB79 calls with the same instance are not permitted. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 280 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Remember that you can influence the execution of the FB with the parameters of the user interface "Connections Integration": If you want to read out a result string using the FB, the output of the result string must be set to PROFINET IO. With the jobs "Select program" (COMMAND =W#16#0001), "Save a program" (COMMAND =W#16#0002) and "Output currently selected program" (COMMAND =W#16#0003), the number of the selected program is queried on the reader. For this reason, output of the result string must also be set to PROFINET IO in these cases. The interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals must always be set to PROFINET IO. The setting of the interface for the result bits READ, MATCH, N_OK is irrelevant for the FB. How it works FB79 "VS130-2_CONTROL" is an asynchronous block, in other words, its execution may be spread over several FB calls. You start job execution, by calling the FB with a job number > 0. Job execution is completed when ACTIVE changes to the value FALSE and either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE (positive edge). Please note that various jobs can be handled in one CPU cycle and ACTIVE does not therefore change to the value TRUE. This involves the "Read out status" and "Reset DISA bit" jobs. In this case, it may also not be possible to detect an edge change at DONE or ERROR. You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the job completed without error, DONE is set = TRUE. In this case, you should also evaluate ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB. As long as ACTIVE has the value TRUE, you will need to call the FB with the identical assignment of the COMMAND input parameter. It is also not possible to start a new job during this time. Read jobs are cyclic jobs. This means that after the start of a job with COMMAND=W#16#0081 to 008F, ACTIVE has the value TRUE. ACTIVE retains this value until the job is stopped again. The read cycle (in other words, the transfer of a complete result string) is completed when ACTIVE has the value TRUE and either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE (positive edge). If you want to start a different job while a read job is running, you will need to cancel the read job first. You do this by calling the FB with COMMAND=W#16#0000. In this case, ACTIVE changes its value to FALSE. Depending on whether a result string is currently being transferred, either DONE or ERROR has the value TRUE. If ERROR has the value TRUE, ERRCODE has the value DW#16#00010007. Note If an error has occurred that changes the reader to STOP, eliminate and acknowledge the error. You can then return the reader to RUN by changing program (COMMAND = W#16#0001). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 281 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Parameter Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description W#16#0000 Address of the control byte of the reader. (instance DB) LADDR_ STEUER INPUT WORD 0.0 LADDR_ STATUS INPUT LADDR_ SEND INPUT WORD 4.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Send" user data interface of the reader. LADDR_ RECV INPUT WORD 6.0 W#16#0000 Start address of the "Receive" user data interface of the reader. COMMAND INPUT WORD 8.0 W#16#0000 Job number: The address must be in the process image of the CPU you are using. WORD 2.0 W#16#0000 Address of the status byte of the reader. The address must be in the process image of the CPU you are using. The permitted values are described following this table. PARAM1 INPUT BYTE 10.0 B#16#00 Number of the program to be selected (relevant only for jobs W#16#0001 and W#16#0002). RESET INPUT BOOL 11.0 FALSE Reset pending error and FB initialization. RECV INPUT ANY 12.0 Receive area for the result string. Only data block areas and the BYTE data type are permitted. You must interconnect this parameter and the data block must be at least as large as the maximum DMC string that can be expected. ACTIVE OUTPUT BOOL 22.0 FALSE ACTIVE = TRUE: Processing of the last job has not yet completed. DONE OUTPUT BOOL 22.1 FALSE DONE = TRUE: Job was completed without errors. With read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to 008F), this simply means that the transfer between the reader and FB (CPU) was errorfree. To find out whether the DMC evaluation was successful, you will need to evaluate bits READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and N_OK (bit 5) in the status byte of the reader. ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 22.2 FALSE ERROR = TRUE: An error has occurred. ERRCODE OUTPUT DWORD 24.0 DW#16# 00000000 Error information: * DW#16#0000 0000: No error * DW#16#0000 wxyz: Warning * DW#16#0001 wxyz: Internal FB error * DW#16#0002 wxyz: Error of the reader (see information table at the end of this section) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 282 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description W#16#0000 Operating status of the reader: (instance DB) STATE OUTPUT WORD 28.0 * W#16#0000: Status not up to date * W#16#0001: RUN (processing mode with output of the result string), in other words, the IN_OP and RDY bits in the status byte are set. * W#16#0002: STOP (including Save program and Adjustment mode), i.e. the IN_OP bit in the status byte is set; the RDY bit, however, is not. * W#16#0003: ERROR, in other words, the IN_OP bit in the status byte is not set. CODE_OUT OUTPUT BYTE 30.0 B#16#00 Number of the program currently selected on the reader LENGTH OUTPUT WORD 32.0 W#16#0000 Length of the result string in bytes SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 283 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Permitted values for the COMMAND parameter Value (W#16#...) Meaning 0000 Cancel current job or no job 0001 Change program 0002 Save program 0003 Output number of the program currently selected on the reader 0004 Output the current status of the reader 0005 Reset DISA control signal 0081 Output the (possibly modified) result string 0082 Output absolute quality parameters 0083 Output absolute quality parameters and output result string 0084 Output quality parameters as classes 0085 Output quality parameters as classes and output result string 0086 Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format 0087 Output quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result string 0088 Output code position 0089 Output code position and result string 008A Output code position and absolute quality parameters 008B Output code position and absolute quality parameters and output result string 008C Output code position and quality parameters as classes 008D Output code position and quality parameters as classes and output result string 008E Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format 008F Output code position and quality parameters as classes and in absolute format and output result string Note To process this job, the following parameters must be set in PROFINET IO: * Connections Integration Text: PROFINET IO Output of the result string (except commands 4 and 5) * Connections Integration Controller: PROFINET IO Interface for the DISA, SEL0 to SEL3, TRN, RES, IN_OP, TRD, RDY signals SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 284 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Parameters not interconnected with the block (static local data) Parameter Declaration Data type Address Default Description (instance DB) X_POSITION STATIC INT 34.0 0 X position of the center point of the code relative to the center of the image. Normalized to the full resolution for the current image. Y_POSITION STATIC INT 36.0 0 Y position of the center point of the code relative to the center of the image. Normalized to the full resolution for the current image. ROT_ANGLE STATIC INT 38.0 0 Roll angle of the code center point INCLINE STATIC INT 40.0 0 Viewing angle (angle between the axis of the reader and the surface of the code field) CONTRAST_F STATIC CHAR 42.0 .. Symbol contrast as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') GROWTH_F STATIC CHAR 43.0 .. Print growth as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') NONUNIF_F STATIC CHAR 44.0 .. Axial non-uniformity as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') ERR_CORR_F STATIC CHAR 45.0 .. Unused error correction (value valid, if not equal to ' ') Note: If a "ReadErr" occurs, the old result data is retained because no new data is available. QUALITY_F STATIC CHAR 46.0 .. Overall grade as class (value valid if not equal to ' ') CONTRAST STATIC REAL 48.0 -1.0e+0 Symbol contrast as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) GROWTH STATIC REAL 52.0 -1.0e+0 Print growth as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) NONUNIF STATIC REAL 56.0 -1.0e+0 Axial non-uniformity as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) ERR_CORR STATIC REAL 60.0 -1.0e+0 Unused error correction as absolute value (value valid if not equal to -1.0e+0) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 285 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Job execution Whether or not a job can execute successfully depends on the current status of the reader. The following table shows which jobs are possible in the various statuses of the reader. You will find the job number in the table of parameters.# Reader status Job number = (hexadecimal) 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0081 to 008F RUN (RDY=1) (processing mode with output of the result strings) X X X X X X X STOP X X X X X X - ERROR (IN_OP=0) X X - X X X - Sequence when canceling a job (COMMAND = W#16#0000) Canceling a job is possible only with read jobs: Read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F) The block signals completion of the job cancel with ACTIVE = FALSE. If a transfer is currently active when the job is canceled, this aborts and the error is reported with an appropriate error message in the ERRCODE parameter. ERROR then has the value TRUE and DONE the value FALSE. A transfer is active if DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. If there is no transfer currently active when the job is canceled, on completion of the job, the ERRCODE parameter has the value 0, ERROR the value FALSE and DONE the value TRUE. Sequence when changing jobs If you want to change to a different job from a read job, the currently active job must be canceled (see above). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 286 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Sequence when changing a program (COMMAND = W#16#0001) If the reader is currently executing a read job, follow these steps: 1. Call FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0000. This cancels the output of the result string (job W#16#0081). 2. Make a program change by calling FB79 with COMMAND=W#16#0001 and PARAM= new program number. When the job is triggered, the DONE and ERROR parameters change to the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block changes the program selected on the reader to the value at the PARAM1 parameter. It then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If the program now selected matches the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. If the program now selected does not match the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. The system also checks whether the program change is being blocked by a "Service" or "User1" user logged on to the user interface who has taken control of the reader, and whether the newly selected program has been saved. If an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. 3. Call FB79 again cyclically with COMMAND=W#16#0081. If you attempt to cancel a current change program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change to DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed. Note * When there is a program change, the reader changes to STOP for at least 150 ms (refer to selecting modes "Select program"). In isolated cases, a program change can take up to 15 s. * If you specify the value 0 in the PARAM1 parameter, the previously selected program will be retained. * The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 287 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Sequence when saving a program (COMMAND = W#16#0002) To allow the FB to trigger the saving of a code, the parameter Connections > Integration > Control must have the value "PROFINET IO". The job can only be sent when the reader is not in the ERROR status (see also the status table following the parameter table). When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block saves the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter. Note * In isolated cases, saving a program can take up to 35 s. * The value of PARAM1 must not be changed before the job is completed. It then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If the program now selected matches the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. If the program now selected does not match the program specified at the PARAM1 parameter, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. The system also checks whether program saving is being blocked by a "Service" or "User1" user logged on to the user interface who has taken over control of the reader, and whether program saving has been successful. If an error is detected, the ACTIVE parameter has the value FALSE and the ERROR parameter has the value TRUE. The ERRCODE parameter contains an appropriate error message. If you attempt to cancel a current save program job, the ERRCODE parameter will change to DW#16#00000002; however, processing for the job will be completed. Sequence when outputting the currently selected program (COMMAND = W#16#0003) When the job is triggered, the parameters DONE and ERROR have the value FALSE. The ACTIVE parameter has the value TRUE. The block then queries the program now selected on the reader and outputs this program at the CODE_OUT parameter. If no error occurs in the transfer of the program number, the ACTIVE parameter will have the value FALSE and the DONE parameter the value TRUE. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 288 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Sequence when outputting the status of the reader (COMMAND = W#16#0004) Based on the status byte of the reader, the block recognizes the current status and outputs this in the STATE parameter: If the IN_OP bit is not set, status 3 (ERROR) is output. If the IN_OP but not the RDY bit is set, status 2 (STOP) is output. If the IN_OP but not the RDY bit are set, status 1 (RUN) is output. The DONE parameter then has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE. Note Since the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value TRUE from a previous job, it is also not possible to detect an edge change. Sequence when resetting the DISA bit (COMMAND = W#16#0005) The block resets the DISA bit in the control byte of the reader. The DONE parameter then has the value TRUE and ACTIVE the value FALSE. Note Since the job completes in one CPU cycle, no edge change can be detected at the ACTIVE parameter. If the DONE parameter already has the value TRUE from a previous job, it is also not possible to detect an edge change. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 289 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 Sequence with the read jobs (COMMAND = W#16#0081 to W#16#008F) Meaning of the COMMAND parameter with read jobs. Value (W#16#...) Meaning 0081 Output result string 0082 Output absolute quality characteristics 0083 Output absolute quality characteristics and output result string 0084 Output quality characteristics as classes 0085 Output quality characteristics as classes and output result string 0086 Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format 0087 Output quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result string 0088 Output code position 0089 Output code position and result string 008A Output code position and absolute quality characteristics 008B Output code position and absolute quality characteristics and output result string 008C Output code position and quality characteristics as classes 008D Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and output result string 008E Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format 008F Output code position and quality characteristics as classes and in absolute format and output result string The read jobs can only be sent when the reader is not in the RUN status (see also the status table following the parameter table). In contrast to all other jobs, the read jobs are "permanent jobs". This means that the ACTIVE parameter retains the value TRUE even after fetching the current read result and/or the current position and/or the quality characteristics from the device. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 290 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 You should therefore evaluate the DONE and ERROR parameters at each block call. If the transfer was successful, DONE = TRUE is set. This, however, only means that the transfer between the reader and the FB (CPU) was error-free. To find out whether the DMC evaluation was successful, you will need to evaluate bits READ (bit 3), MATCH (bit 4) and N_OK (bit 5) in the status byte of the reader. You fill find the reactions of FB79 in the following table. You should also evaluate ERRCODE to learn of warnings from the FB. Reader Target area RECV The code could not be decoded. FB79 enters the string set in "ReadErr". The code was successfully decoded; however, you have not set any specifications. FB79 enters the result string. The code was successfully decoded but does not match your specifications. FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr" or "FilterMsg" if the match or filter function is selected in the parameter settings. If both of these functions are selected, FB79 enters the string set in "MatchErr". For more detailed information on "MatchErr" and "FilterMsg", refer to chapter 5. The code was successfully decoded and matches your specifications. FB79 enters the result string. Process the data entered in RECV before the next trigger otherwise there is no guarantee of the consistency of this data! At the same time, you should also evaluate the LENGTH parameter, since the receive area is written only up to this length. You can cancel a current read job by calling FB79 with COMMAND = W#16#0000. If an error occurs when processing a job or when a current read job is canceled, ERROR = TRUE is set. In this case, the ERRCODE parameter contains an ID indicating the cause of the error. FB79 writes B#16#00 to the RECV target area. Startup behavior If an error occurs (ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000), you will need to initialize the FB once with RESET=TRUE after calling an interrupt OB (for example OB82) and after a STOP-RUN change on the CPU. Please include a suitable first call in your user program. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 291 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 10.4.4.1 Error information of FB79 Error information If an error has occurred, ERROR = TRUE is set. The precise cause of the error is then displayed in ERRCODE. There are also warnings for which ERROR is set to FALSE. They indicate error situations that do not cause the current job to be canceled. If ERRCODE <> DW#16#0000 0000 following an FB call, you will need to call the FB again with RESET=TRUE to reset the error information in the FB. Note By calling the FB with RESET=TRUE, you acknowledge only the error codes of the FB. To acknowledge errors of the reader (for example, transmit error), you will need to set the RES bit of the control byte (see assignment of the interfaces of the reader relevant for PROFINET IO or error messages). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 292 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.4 Control with FB79 ERRCODE (DW#16#) ERROR Explanation 0000 0000 0 No error 0000 0001 0 New job inactive as long as old job is active. 0000 0002 0 Job cannot be canceled. 0001 0001 1 Illegal job number (COMMAND parameter). 0001 0002 1 The job cannot be processed in the current status of the reader. 0001 0003 1 During normal operation (not startup and no error has occurred), the FB was called with RESET=TRUE or the user data interface is already occupied by a different FB instance. 0001 0004 1 Send/receive user data interface not available or incomplete 0001 0005 1 The selected program number does not match the number specified at the FB, possibly because control of the reader has been taken over by the user interface. 0001 0006 1 Invalid program number (PARAM1 parameter). Program numbers 1 to 14 (save program) and 0 to 15 (change program) are permitted. 0001 0007 1 Job canceled by user. 0001 0008 1 Program saving is not possible, possibly because control of the reader has been taken over by the user interface. 0001 0009 1 Illegal receive area. Only data blocks and the BYTE data type are permitted. 0001 8092 1 The receive area does not exist. 0001 8323 1 The receive area is too short. 0001 8325 1 Illegal data area. 0001 8330 1 To receive area is write-protected. 0002 0003 1 The selected program number is not saved. 0002 0004 1 Program cannot be saved. Position the code within the image or improve the image quality. 0002 0005 1 Job canceled by reader. Note If you receive error information that differs from that listed above, this originates from SFC 20 "BLKMOV" that is used to enter the result string in the receive area. You will find its error information in the online help of the system functions/function blocks. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 293 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" 10.5.1 Control signals Note Control via DI/DO can only be used as selected in the parameter settings in the user interface in "Connections Digital I/O". Input signals Name Function DISA Disable: Disables manual keyboard input, program selection and program saving via digital I/O, error acknowledgment, starting the reader. SEL0 Select 0: Program selection bit 0 SEL1 Select 1: Program selection bit 1 (when TRN=0) / Save program (when TRN=1) SEL2 Select 2: Program selection bit 2 SEL3 Select 3: Program selection bit 3 TRN Train: Saves new program TRG Trigger: Processing starts on a positive edge. RES Reset: Reset error. Note The SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3, and TRN signals are effective only when DISA=1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 294 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Output signals Name Function IN_OP In operation: TRD * 0 = error message is displayed. * 1 = reader functioning, no error Trained: * * RDY 10.5.2 In run: - 0 = Selected program has not been saved. - 1 = Selected program has been saved. When saving program (TRN=1): - 0 = Save program active. - 1 = acknowledgment signal (RDY=0) LED Displayed by LED1 or LED2 according to your parameter settings Ready: * 0 = startup of reader or reader in stop * 1 = reader in run READ Processing result: Code was localized and decoded. MATCH Processing result: Code matches the trained code. N_OK Code was not legible. Selecting modes The following modes are available: Select program Save program Start processing You will find a description of the modes in operator control of the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 295 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Select program To select a program, apply the relevant bit pattern at the inputs SEL0 to SEL3. You can select programs 1 to 15. If you select program 0, the program last selected will be retained. 6(/ 6(/ 6(/ 6(/ ',6$ 5(6 751 75* ,1B23 75' 5'< W 6WDUWRUFKDQJH SURJUDPVHOHFWLRQ $SSO\ SURJUDPVHOHFWLRQ bPV bPVbWRbVPD[ SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 296 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Step Input 1 DISA=1 Output Description Program selection is prepared. TRN=0 DISA must have the value 1. No edge change is necessary. TRG=0 RES=0 2 Select program, for example, program 11. SEL0=1 SEL1=1 SEL2=0 SEL3=1 3 TRD=0 Program selection is started. RDY=0 5 TRD=1 Program change is completed after approximately 150 ms to 15 s. RDY=1 Note If the selected program is not saved, TRD and RDY will retain the value 0. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 297 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Save program The diagram below shows the save program procedure, using program 11 as an example. Note that the trigger signal must be present for at least 5 ms. !PV !PV !PV 6(/ 6(/ 6(/ 6(/ ,QSXWVLJQDOV ',6$ 5(6 751 75* ,1B23 2XWSXWVLJQDOV 75' 5'< W V PV PVV 6DYHSURJUDP VWDUW 6DYHSURJUDP FRPSOHWHG SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 298 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Note After an error has occurred, you will need to set the SEL0 to SEL3 signals and the TRN signal to 0 and then reset the error with the RES signal. The DISA signal must have the value 1 (no edge change). Description of saving programs Step Input 1 DISA=1 Output Description Disable keyboard control. DISA must have the value 1. No edge change is necessary. Apply for at least 100 ms: Select program to save, for example code 11. SEL0 = 1 SEL1 = 1 SEL2 = 0 SEL3 = 1 2 TRN = 1 Start program saving SEL0, SEL1, SEL2, SEL3 =0 3 TRD=0 TRD signal changes to FALSE RDY=0 RDY signal changes to FALSE Wait at least 200 ms Feed in object with data matrix code. SEL1=1 Save program Apply for at least 5 ms: Trigger signal TRG=1 4 5 TRD = 1 Selected program has been saved. SEL1=0 Reset signals. TRN = 0 Exit program saving. TRD = 0 TRD signal changes to FALSE for 150 ms. TRD = 1 TRD signal changes to TRUE. RDY=1 Program saving is exited. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 299 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.5 Controlling the I/O interface "DI/DO" Starting processing Processing starts immediately upon completion of program saving. Step Input Output Description 1 You select a program, for example program 11. 2 The outputs are set as follows depending on the processing result: READ MATCH N_OK Code was localized and decoded. Code matches the trained code. Code was not legible. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 300 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.1 Overview You can control the reader using an RS-232 or TCP/IP connection. Note Upload process not yet completed: Control commands are discarded Until the reader completes the restart, all control commands discarded. * To find out whether or not the reader is ready for operation, you will need to query the status (Page 305) until the reader sends a response frame. This applies even when you use a TCP/IP connection. In this case, an existing TCP/IP connection does not mean that the reader has already completed the restart. Requirement To trigger a command via TCP/IP or RS232, the specific transport connection must be configured as a trigger source in the adjustment support. The appropriate transport connection must be configured as a source for the controller for all other commands (Connections Integration Connection). When you use the TCP/IP transport connection, the reader is the client and actively establishes the connection to the partner. The partner must be the server and accept an incoming connection at the port configured (Connections Interfaces TCP). Note Restriction with identical transport connection for trigger and control The following restriction applies when an identical transport connection is configured as the source for trigger and control in the adjustment support (Connections Integration Connection): * If "M" is configured as a trigger text, the remaining control commands can no longer be used. * If "MATCH" is configured as a trigger text, the command to overwrite the match strings can no longer be used. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 301 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 You can use this connection for: Triggering Overwriting the match string of the current program (non-persistent) Setting and resetting the DISA bit Changing program Saving programs Querying the status of the reader and acknowledging group errors Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Setting "Digital out" A control command is triggered in each case by the corresponding string. Overview of all commands with a string 10.6.2 Command Character string Trigger Identical to the configured string in the adjustment support Write match string See "Write match string" (Page 303) Set DISA bit MDIH Reset DISA bit MDIL Query status MGST Program change (select program number) MR<program number> Save program with internal trigger MI<program number> Save program with external trigger MT<program number> Reset command MRES XMATCH command See "XMATCH command (writing a triggersynchronized match string)" (Page 310) and "XMATCH user data (without header)" (Page 311). Set digital out MO<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6> Trigger If the reader receives a character string that is identical to the configured character string in the adjustment support, it triggers image acquisition and processing. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 302 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.3 Write match string Note Sent match string takes effect immediately A sent match string takes effect immediately. The sent match string is not synchronized with the trigger signal or the processing of buffered image acquisition. * Therefore, ensure that the match string is sent when no image acquisition is running. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR Sending a match string is only possible if, in "2. Filter", the source "Filter with match text" or "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification. The match string is then either a defined string or a syntax corresponding to "Character type at pos.". Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in adjustment support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. The following command must be sent to overwrite the match string: Structure / description Character no. 0 Meaning Command identifier 1 Value/ character M A 2 T 3 C 4 H 5 6 More significant byte of the length m of the following match string Less significant byte New match string with a of the length m of the length m following match string 7 ... n-1 n 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF All printable characters The characters 5 and 6 are interpreted as an unsigned 16-bit word and form the overall length of the new match string starting at character 7. It is only possible to overwrite a match string if the reader is in processing mode and matching was activated during program saving for the current program. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 303 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 When the new match string is saved, this is not persistent: If the reader exits processing mode, for example by changing to STOP mode or to the group error status, the overwritten match string is discarded. This also applies to a program change. The characters of the command must be sent as a contiguous command. If the spacing between the individual characters is too long, reception of the new match string is aborted. Note If the match string cannot be overwritten, an entry is made in the diagnostic data. 10.6.4 Set DISA bit This command sets the DISA bit. Character string "MDIH" (Machine command set DIsable signal High) 10.6.5 Reset DISA bit This command resets the DISA bit. Character string "MDIL" (Machine command set DIsable signal Low) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 304 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.6 Query status This command returns the status byte, the current program number and an error number in the response string. Character string "MGST" (Machine command Get STate) Response string "RGST<statusbyte><currentprogramnumber><errornumber><endidentifier>" (Reply Get STate) <status byte> - Non-displayable ASCII characters that corresponds to the status byte (see section "Assignment of the interfaces relevant to PROFINET IO (Page 270)"). <currentprogramnumber> - Currently selected program number. <end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII characters with the value 0x04. Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 00 to 15. <error no> - Error code of the currently pending error (see section "Error messages (Page 334)"). Coding as for <currentprogramnumber>. No error pending if the value is 00. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 305 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.7 Select program number This command changes the program or switches to processing mode with the specified program number, if one exists. Character string "MR<program number>" (Machine command Run program <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two displayable ASCII characters with value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 00 to 15. This command returns no response string. Using the "Query status" command, you then check if the program change has been successful. If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is queried, the string "MR05MGST" can be sent. Using <statusbyte> and <currentcodenumber>, you can check whether the reader is in processing mode with the new program number. If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and then reset it. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 306 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.8 Save program with internal trigger Note This command is only possible when the identical transport connection is configured as the trigger and the control source. This command starts saving the program and internally generates a trigger for image acquisition. The code is saved with the specified number. If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the save procedure, this program will be overwritten. If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the appropriate program number. Character string "MI<program number>" (Machine command Immediate store code <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 01 to 5. This command returns no response string. Using the "Query status" command you then check if the save procedure was successful. If, for example, program number 5 is selected and the status is then queried, the string "MI05MGST" can be sent. Using <status byte>, <current program number> and <error number>, check: - Whether the reader has successfully stored the program and is in processing mode. - Or whether an error has occurred. If the DISA bit is not set already, the reader will set it automatically to save the program and then reset it. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 307 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.9 Save program with external trigger Note Set DISA bit beforehand In order to execute this command, the DISA bit must be set beforehand. 1. This command starts saving the program. 2. Subsequently, a trigger signal is sent/set separately at the earliest after receipt of the response string. The program is saved with the specified number. If a program has already been saved with this number and no error occurred during the save procedure, this program will be overwritten. If the save procedure is successful, the reader then goes into processing mode with the new program number. Character string "MT<program number>" (Machine command sTore code <program number>) <program number>-Number of the program saved. Two printable ASCII characters with the value "0" to "9". Valid range of values: 01 to 5. Response string "RTRDY<end identifier>" (Reply sTore program ReaDY) <end identifier> - Non-displayable ASCII characters with the value 0x04. After this response string is received, a trigger can be sent via an external source. If this response string is not sent, either the DISA bit has not been set or <program no> is outside the valid range. If "RTRDY" is received and the trigger is sent, the status must be queried cyclically with "MGST". The query is used to check whether the save procedure is completed. When the save procedure is completed, the reader will be in processing mode with <program no>. If the reader is not in processing mode and there is no error state, the save procedure is not finished or it is still waiting for the trigger signal. Once the save procedure is completed, the DISA bit is reset. The save procedure can be canceled with Reset command (Page 309) (upon receipt of "RTRDY"). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 308 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Example string sequence Send MDIH MGST Receive MT05 RGST... Explanation Set Status query DISA bit. If no error is pending, then the save procedure starts. Start the save procedure . T ... ... Wait for Trigger acknowled Here, with gement. the default trigger text, whereby trigger source = control source. Cyclic status query; recommended time interval: 1 s. RGST... * If the reader is in processing mode with program number 05, the save procedure has been successful. * A pending error means that the program could not be saved (e.g. no code in the image). Trigger * also possible via DI/DO, for example. 10.6.10 MGST RTRDY If the reader is not in processing mode and there is no group error, the save procedure is not yet finished. Reset command This command acknowledges an error or cancels "Save program with external trigger". Character string "MRES" (Machine command RESet) This command returns no response string. Send "MRESMGST" to get acknowledgment. If "Save program with external trigger" is cancelled with the reset command, the reader will briefly be in an error state (error in sequence). The error state is automatically exited or acknowledged. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 309 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.11 Writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Note Availability of XMATCH The XMATCH function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Requirements for matching with OCR Sending a match string with OCR A match string can only be sent: If the source "Filter with match text" is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". If the source "Character type at pos." is configured as the string specification for the corresponding step (OCR type) under "Filter". The match string is therefore either a defined string or a corresponding "Character type at pos." syntax. Identical formatting of the sent match string The match string that is sent must be identical to the input made in adjustment support. Permitted non-printable special characters must be sent as one character. A line break (\n) for example as '\n' (ASCII value 0x0D) and not as '\''n' (ASCII values 0x2F and 0x6E). Requirement for matching with 1D/2D codes For 1D/2D codes all match options ("All", "Position", "ID", "GS1") are supported. The match string that is sent must be formatted so that the information required for the comparison can be extracted. Note GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional For match strings used for the match option "GS1", the GS1 start symbol "]d2" is optional. Character string To send an XMATCH command, the string "XMATCH" must be sent as the header followed by the XMATCH user data. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 310 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 10.6.12 XMATCH user data (without header) Note Only parts of new program structure can be used The XMATCH frame reflects the program structure of firmware versions V4 and lower (1D/2D code + up to 5 OCR steps). You cannot make full use of the new program structure with the XMATCH frame. Backward compatibility with firmware version V4 XML import enables compatible mapping. Following an XML import or your programs or codes, firmware version V4, you can continue to use the identical XMATCH frames. The compatibility image as follows: Previous code index match strings are always assigned to step 1. OCR ROI 1 to 5 are mapped to steps 2 to 6. Logical structure of the user data The logical structure of an XMATCH frame is outlined in the table: Trigger Permanent ID flag Code No Cnt n Code Code Idx No Cnt c Code Idx String String length cl length cm c times ROI ID Cnt r ROI ID String length rl String rm t times Trigger ID and permanent flag Based on the trigger ID, all match strings of this frame are assigned to a specific trigger signal. If the permanent flag is set in this frame, the match strings are a valid as of this trigger ID. If the permanent flag is set in this frame and the trigger ID is "0", the match strings are valid as of the next trigger. The trigger ID is assigned to the value of the internal trigger counter of the reader. The internal trigger counter is set to 1: When processing mode starts up When there is a program change After an error (IN_OP not set) Following this, the internal trigger counter is incremented by 1 following each trigger. When the counter reaches the value 32767, it continues with 1 (not 0). The value 0 is reserved to accept match strings permanently as of the next trigger. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 311 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Code No Cnt n and Code No Code No Cnt n must always be 1. Code no. must match the code number that is in processing mode. Code Idx Cnt c With an application in which no 1D/2D codes are read, Code Idx Cnt = 0 must be set. If code Idx Cnt 0, this value matches the number of code match strings in the frame; with a non-multicode application, this value is 1. Depending on the code Idx Cnt c, then code Idx , string length cl and the string follow c times. Code Idx, String length cl and String cm Code Idx is the index of the code to which the new match string will be assigned. String length cl corresponds to the length of the following match string cm. ROI ID Cnt r With an application in which no plain text is read (OCR), ROI ID Cnt r = 0 must be set. If ROI ID Cnt r 0, this value corresponds to the number of OCR ROI match strings in the frame. Depending on ROI ID Cnt r, ROI ID, String length rl and String rm follow r times in the frame. ROI ID, String length rl and String rm: ROI ID corresponds to the number of the OCR ROI match strings to be assigned to the new match string. String length rl corresponds to the length of the following match string rm. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 312 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Detailed structure of the user data Note Data type BYTE and WORD * BYTE: 8 bits * WORD: 16 bits, in Big Endian format ("S7 format") Meaning Data type Value range Comment Total length in bytes (excluding the length itself = starting at trigger ID) WORD max. 32768 Area over which the checksum is formed. Trigger ID WORD 1 ... 32767 Flags BYTE Bit 0: Permanent flag Code No Cnt n BYTE 1 Code No BYTE 1 ... 14 Code Idx Cnt c BYTE SIMATIC MV440 UR: 0 ... 150 Bit 1 to 7: Reserved, must be 0 All other readers: 0 ... 50 Code Idx BYTE SIMATIC MV440 UR: 1 ... 150 c times All other readers: 1 ... 50 String length cl WORD 1 ... 3001 String cm cl BYTEs Any ASCII characters ROI ID Cnt r BYTE 0 ... 5 ROI ID BYTE 1 ... 5 String length rl WORD 1 ... 255 String rm rl BYTEs Any ASCII characters XOR checksum BYTE 0 ... 255 t times Checksum = 0 means no checksum SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 313 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Checksum The user data contains a checksum byte whose use is recommended when using the RS232 interface. If the checksum is not used and will not be checked by the reader, the checksum byte must have the value 0. To calculate the checksum, all bytes as of the total length (inclusive) up to the byte of the checksum (exclusive) are XORed. Bad frames If an XMATCH frame with an incorrect structure is received, the error is logged in the diagnostics data records as a temporary error (transient error) and the frame is discarded. Bad structure: For example String length cl > 3 001 characters or checksum incorrect. Even with a correct frame structure, the XMATCH command can be invalid. The error is also logged in the diagnostics data records as a temporary error (Page 345). Examples of XMATCH user data Application: 1D/2D code reading Current program number is "5". new match string for trigger number 42 No OCR No multicode Total length 19 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 1 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" ROI ID Cnt 0 XOR checksum 0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 314 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Application: 1D/2D code reading + OCR Current program number is "5". New 1D/2D code match string and new match string for OCR ROI 1 and 2 for trigger number 42 No multicode Total length 33 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 1 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" ROI ID Cnt 2 ROI ID 1 String length 2 String "SN" ROI ID 2 String length 6 String "012345" XOR checksum 0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 315 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 Application: Evaluate two 1D/2D codes per image (multicode) Current program number is "5". New 1D/2D code match string for code index 1 and 2 for trigger number 42 No OCR 10.6.13 Total length 30 Trigger ID 42 Flags 0 Code No Cnt 1 Code No 5 Code Idx Cnt 2 Code Idx 1 String length 8 String "SN012345" Code Idx 2 String length 8 String "SN612345" ROI ID Cnt 0 XOR checksum 0 Set digital out Note Availability of "Digital Out" The "Digital out" function is not available for SIMATIC MV420 SR-B. Writing command data With this command, the four logical signals "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" can be set and linked to other logical signals. These signals can only be set via an automation system. These signals can also be applied to the available digital output pins using adjustment support. Receipt of this command is logged in the diagnostics data records. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 316 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.6 Control via TCP/IP and RS-232 String "MO<p1><p2><p3><p4><p5><p6>" (Machine command set digital out) Parameter Meaning p1 Number of the logical external signal. * Two displayable ASCII characters with value "1" to "4" - p2 Level of the signal * p3 ASCII characters with the value "0" to "2". - 0: Set level statically to "low". - 1: Set level statically to "high". - 2: Set level for configured pulse time to "high". Link type * p4 Corresponds to "EXT_1", "EXT_2", "EXT_3" and "EXT_4" ASCII characters with the value "1" to "7" - 1: Logical "OR" - 2: Logical "AND" - 3: Logical "Exclusive OR" - 4: no link - 5: Logical "OR not" - 6: Logical "AND not" - 7: Logical "Exclusive OR not" Logical signal linked to. If p3 = "4", the parameter has no significance. * p5 and p6 ASCII characters with the value "0" to "5" - 0: Logical signal "IN_OP" - 1: Logical signal "TRD" - 2: Logical signal "RDY" - 3: Logical signal "READ" - 4: Logical signal "MATCH" - 5: Logical signal "NOK" Reserved, must be "0" to retain upwards compatibility. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 317 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application 10.7 Scanner portal application Introduction The section "Scanner Portal application" explains how you can implement a scanner portal application with several readers. In a scanner portal application, there is a large field of view that is covered by several individual readers. Here, the areas of the field of view of the readers overlap. To prevent the same code being output more than once, the individual readers (slaves) send their read result to a master reader. The master reader synchronizes the individual results and prevents the output of multiple read results. The master reader itself is also a slave that searches for 1D/2D codes in the field of view. Restrictions of the scanner portal application The scanner portal application is subject to the following restrictions: All readers must operate in the untriggered image acquisition mode "Autotrigger". If several different 1D/2D codes with identical contents are read one after the other, the content is output only once. The master reader can only output the synchronized result via the TCP interface. The formatting options of the result string of the master camera are restricted. A maximum of five readers (4 slaves, and 1 master) are supported. If a slave reader is in an error state, the master reader does not change to an error state. The master reader does not monitor the number of connected slave readers. Maximum results of 2048 characters including a formatting instruction required for synchronization can be synchronized. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 318 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application 10.7.1 Configuration Slave and master Both on the slave readers and on the master, you need to make the following settings in the adjustment support. Image acquisition, "Control" tab To control the image acquisition, select the "Auto trigger" mode (without "Initial trigger"). "Recognize double reads" must be set to 1 in this case. The acquisition interval must be adequately high so that 1D/2D codes can be read in the image. The interval must be identical on all slave and master devices. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 319 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application Connections/integration Under "Connection", "integration". select TCP as "String". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 320 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application Programs - Overall result The program format string on all readers must be "\02[CamId]\03%s\04". - [CamId] can be selected freely and is used to identify the reader that read the 1D/2D code in the field of view. - "\02\03%s\04" is also valid if no identification of the reader is required when the result is output. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 321 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application Slave In addition to the settings made in the section "Slaves and master", you also need to make the following settings on all the slave readers. Connections/interfaces: TCP IP Address: IP address of the master reader port: 666 Time limit: 3 s Connections/integration In the "Connection monitoring" group, the TCP idling string must be: "\04". Options/Extras Disable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group. Master You also need to make the following additional settings on the master reader. Connections/interfaces: TCP IP Address: IP address of the TCP partner of the master reader port: Port number of the TCP partner of the master reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 322 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.7 Scanner portal application Options/Extras Enable the "Master reader" check box in the "Scanner portal" group. 10.7.2 Output of the synchronized read result by the master reader Output via the TCP interface The master reader synchronizes the results of the slave readers and outputs the synchronized result via the TCP interface. The result string of the slave reader that first reads the 1D/2D code is output. To compare the 1D/2D codes read, the master device compares the string between "\03" and "\04". The entire result string is output although "\02", "\03" and "\04" are first removed. If a slave reader sends the result string "\02Slave01:\03DMC123\04" and read the"DMC123" code first, the master reader sends the "Slave01:DMC123" string to its TCP partner. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 323 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client 10.8 Remote client Introduction The remote client interface is an HTTP-based interface. The remote client can send HTTP requests to the reader to bring about a certain functionality. To do this, an IP address must be configured in the adjustment support corresponding to the address of the client. The reader only processes HTTP requests if the sender has this IP address. 10.8.1 XML backup and XML restore Note Do not control via the control interface / only when the DISA bit is not set With the automation process, you must make sure that when the functions XML backup and XML restore execute, there is no control via the control interface. Otherwise, XML backup and XML restore cannot be executed. It is important that the DISA bit is not set. Note Backing up the diagnostics images before XML backup and XML restore If you run the XML backup and XML restart functions, any diagnostics images in the memory of the reader will be deleted. * If required, save the diagnostic images before you use these functions. To run an XML backup and an XML restart, there is a separate HTTP request for each. After receiving the relevant HTTP request, the following steps are performed first in both cases assuming that the preconditions are met: 1. The connection to the adjustment support is terminated. If adjustment support is opened while the HTTP request is being processed by the reader, this is only possible in "READ ONLY mode". 2. The reader changes to the "Stop" mode. 3. The IN_OP bit is et to "0". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 324 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client 10.8.1.1 XML backup Once the reader has sent the HTTP response, the IN_OP bid is set and access using the adjustment support is permitted again. Request URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/backup.cgi e.g. http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi HTTP method: GET Response Note Parameter "<filename>" The filename is made up of the reader name and the firmware version. HTTP status code 200 (OK) Content type: text/xml; name="<filename>.xml" Content disposition: attachment; filename="<filename>.xml" Data: The data corresponds to the file content of an xml file that is used to restore the settings and programs. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 325 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client Pseudocode example C# Pseudocode XML Backup // Create new xml file FileStream newXml = File.Open("C:\\mv400para.xml", FileMode.Create); // Create http request HttpWebRequest myRequest = (HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/backup.cgi"); myRequest.Method = "GET"; myRequest.ContentLength = 0; try { // Get response HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse(); // Get response stream Stream streamResponse = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream(); // Read stream and write to file (stream == xml data) byte[] readBuffer = new byte[256]; int count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0)); while (count > 0) { newXml.Write(readBuffer, 0, count); count = streamResponse.Read(readBuffer, 0, readBuffer.GetLength(0)); } Console.WriteLine("XML backup succeeded."); } catch (System.Net.WebException we) { Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML BACKUP!"); } SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 326 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client 10.8.1.2 XML restore Note Frequent use of XML restore can reduce the working life of the reader With each XML restore, there are write operations to the flash memory. If the XML restore function is used frequently, this can reduce the working life of the reader. Note When the "remote client" IP address should not be imported The "remote client" IP address is assigned to the TCP settings. If you do not want this IP address to be imported, the import of the TCP settings for XML restore must be disabled. Request URI: http://<IP address of the reader>/xml/restore.cgi e.g. http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi HTTP method: POST Content type: "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n" POST data Note Meaning of "xmlDoc" "xmlDoc" corresponds to the string with the content of a backup XML file. "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"xmlfile\"\r\nContent-Type: text/xml\r\n\r\n" + xmlDoc + "\r\n" + // remove next line if TCP settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importtcp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remove next line if PROFINET settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importdp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remote next line if security settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importsec\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remote next line if codes shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importcodes\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n" SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 327 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client Response HTTP status code 200 (OK) Data: - "2" -> XML upload and import were only partially successful. The reader restarts. To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated using the adjustment support. - "1" -> XML upload and import was only successful. The reader restarts. - "0" -> Error importing. To obtain an error analysis, the XML import must be repeated using the adjustment support. The IN_OP bit is set and access using the adjustment support is permitted again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 328 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.8 Remote client Pseudocode example C# Pseudocode XML Restore Stream newStream; string xmlDoc = File.ReadAllText("C:\\mv400para.xml"); ASCIIEncoding encoding = new ASCIIEncoding(); // Prepare POST data string postData = "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"xmlfile\"\r\nContent-Type: text/xml\r\n\r\n" + xmlDoc + "\r\n" + // remove next line if TCP settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importtcp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remove next line if PROFINET settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importdp\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remote next line if security settings shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importsec\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + // remote next line if codes shall not be imported "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\nContent-Disposition: form-data; name=\"importcodes\"\r\n\r\non\r\n" + "[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n"; buffer = encoding.GetBytes(postData); // Create http request HttpWebRequest myRequest = (HttpWebRequest)WebRequest.Create("http://192.168.0.42/xml/restore.cgi"); myRequest.Method = "POST"; myRequest.ContentType = "multipart/form-data; boundary=[REMOTEXMLUPLOADPARA]\r\n"; myRequest.ContentLength = buffer.Length; // Send the data. newStream = myRequest.GetRequestStream(); newStream.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); try { // Get response HttpWebResponse myHttpWebResponse = (HttpWebResponse)myRequest.GetResponse(); // Get response data int response = myHttpWebResponse.GetResponseStream().ReadByte(); if (response != -1) { Char value = (Char)response; if (value.Equals('1')) Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded, device is restarting..."); else if (value.Equals('2')) Console.WriteLine("XML restore succeeded only partially, not all codes could be imported. Device is restarting. More information via graphical user interface."); else Console.WriteLine("XML restore failed. More information via graphical user interface."); } } catch (System.Net.WebException we) { Console.WriteLine("NO PERMISSION FOR XML RESTORE!"); } SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 329 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.9 Sample programs 10.9 Sample programs 10.9.1 Introduction Examples Example 1: Program for interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 Example 2: Program for archiving diagnostic information on a PC/PG 10.9.2 Example 1: Program for interfacing the reader with a SIMATIC controller using FB79 You will find the program described here on the manual/commissioning CD in Examples\SIMATIC. Including FB79 in a STEP 7 program In the accompanying STEP 7 program, the FC1 function contains a simple example for outputting the result string. You can execute a program change using the FC2 function. When supplied, only FC1 is called in OB1. To activate FC2, you will need to either delete the first network with the FC1 call or skip it. Note You may only assign the value W#16#0081 for the COMMAND parameter (output result string) when bit 2 (corresponds to the RDY signal) is set to TRUE in the status byte. Otherwise the "Illegal mode" error will result. Process interfacing The reader is connected with a programmable logic controller via PROFINET IO. A light barrier or a Bero is used additionally for triggering and must be read in via a digital input module. The received data is stored in data block DB48 in bytes 0 to 500. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 330 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.9 Sample programs Adding program change Specify the number of the required program in memory byte MB200. The program change runs automatically. The correct order of the commands is adhered to. The FB changes to the program specified at PARAM1. CAUTION Avoiding undefined plant states To avoid undefined plant states, you should only change programs when the plant is in manual mode or is not in operation. Startup OB OB100 In OB100, you set the RESET input of FB79 to initialize the FB. This input is reset again by calling FB79. Bits of the control and status bytes used The following control and status bits need to be processed in your program in addition to the FB79 call: Bit no. in Corresponds to signal Function Q x.6 Control byte TRG Processing starts on a positive edge. Q x.7 Control byte RES Reset sensor error I x.0 Status byte IN_OP 0: error or startup, 1: Sensor is functional I x.2 Status byte RDY 1: Sensor is in RUN, in other words ready to process codes. You can use this signal to enable the feed of work pieces. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 331 Process interfacing via an automation system (PLC, PC) 10.9 Sample programs 10.9.3 Example 2: Program for archiving diagnostic information on a PC/PG You will find the program described here on the manual/commissioning CD in Examples\Diagnostics. With the "mmidiag" example, you can archive diagnostics data records in the form of csv files and diagnostics images as bitmaps on a PC. In addition to the diagnostics images, a text file containing details of the image is also transferred. Process interfacing The configuration is based on the configuration described in the section on reading codes or grading quality in a PROFINET environment and output via Ethernet. It is characteristic of this configuration that the PC or programming device for archiving of the diagnostics data records and/or diagnostics images is connected to the reader not over RS-232 but over Ethernet. Setup support Make the following settings in the setup support: "Connections" task, "Interfaces" tab: In "Archiving/MMI", enter the IP address and the port of the PC/programming device on which you want to archive the diagnostics information. "Connections" task, "Interfaces" tab: Select what you want to archive in "Diagnostics transfer": Only diagnostics data records, only diagnostics images or both. Sample program Make sure that you set the same values in the example under "Connections" as in the adjustment support on the "Interfaces" tab of the "Connections" task. Specify the maximum size of a csv file under "Options". If the current csv file exceeds this size, the sample program creates a new csv file. In the "Timeout" input box, you can also specify the time in seconds after which the sample program stops itself if it has received no response from the reader during this time. This allows you to recognize whether or not the connection to the reader is still established. In "Output", you specify the folders in which the diagnostics images and the csv files will be stored. When you click the "Start" button, the program waits for the connection to be established by the reader. Transfer of the diagnostics data begins after the connection is established. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 332 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.1 11 Introduction If there are operator errors or errors in processing mode, the reader outputs diagnostic information. This diagnostic information is output: As a message via the user interface. Via the POWER, ETHERNET and STATE/SF LED displays. When using onboard PROFINET and FB79 or the Ident profile in the device diagnostics. When using FB45 and the Ident profile in the diagnostics. 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Overview The messages are divided into the following types: Error messages Warnings/notes Read results All three messages are displayed in the user interface. Most messages of the "error message" type, trigger a diagnostics interrupt on the relevant PROFINET controller. All the messages, their meaning and the ways to deal with them are described in "Error messages", "Warnings/notes" and "Read results". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 333 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information 11.2.1 Error messages With error messages, the "IN_OP" signal (in operation) is reset and the STATE/SF LED is lit RED permanently. In addition, the Ready or Done bit is reset with a connection via FB45 or the Ident profile. If the reader is connected to PROFINET IO, these error messages trigger a diagnostics interrupt on the relevant I/O controller if there is a number in the "Value (PROFINET)" column in the following table. How to read out and evaluate the diagnostic information available on the reader is described in I/O diagnostics. Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS232) Value Value (Ident (FB45, error_MOBY) profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Fault in internal W#16#5001 interface to the image sensor 01 01 E1, FE, 02 There is a fault in the internal interface to the image sensor. If the error continues to occur after turning on the device again, contact technical support. Error during DISA signal change W#16#5003 03 02 E6, FE, 04 DISA signal changed at an invalid time (while program was being saved) Check the sequence of applied signals. Restart the save program operation. Error in sequence W#16#5004 04 02 E6, FE, 04 While the program is being saved, the correct sequence of applied signals is violated. Check the sequence of applied signals. Restart the save program operation. Error - code corrupt W#16#5005 05 04 E1, FE, 06 Cannot restore code. Start saving the program again. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 334 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS232) Value Value (Ident (FB45, error_MOBY) profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem The send buffer is full because the data cannot be sent in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency. With TCP: Process the results on the server faster. (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Transfer error TCP or RS232 W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 A high load on the network to which the reader is connected can also block the transfer of the data. If necessary, check the network connection. With RS232: Increase the baud rate. The image buffer size in "Program" can also be increased under Image acquisition, "Control" tab to expand the send buffer. Error - transfer error archiving/ MMI W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is full because the data cannot be sent in an adequately short time or the server is not confirming receipt of the data in time. Reduce the trigger frequency or reduce the amount of diagnostic data to be archived. Process the results on the server faster. A high load on the network to which the reader is connected can also block the transfer of the data. If necessary, check the network connection. Error - transfer error PROFINET IO W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 The send buffer is full because the data cannot be queried in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency or process the results faster. If necessary, change the update time in the PROFINET configuration. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 335 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS232) Value Value (Ident (FB45, error_MOBY) profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem The send buffer is full because the data cannot be queried in an adequately short time. Reduce the trigger frequency or process the results more quickly on the CPU. If necessary, the baud rate on the ASM connection can also be increased (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Error - transfer error ASM/ PROFINET IO W#16#5007 07 0A E1, FE, 04 To cover short peaks, the image buffer size of the program under Image acquisition, "Control" tab can be increased. Error saving code W#16#500A 10 02 E6, FE, 04 No code was found in the image during program saving. Position the code within the image or improve the image quality. Error - match error W#16#500B 11 0E E1, FE, 07 The saved code cannot be processed with the match settings (for example ID/separator not found) Adapt the match settings, or save a suitable code. Error W#16#500C 12 02 E6, FE, 04 The code found during saving does not comply with the ECC 200 standard. Use a code conforming to the standard or change to the standard decoder. No ECC 200 code Note: Applies only to the ID-Genius decoder. Error TCP communication W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Connection error in communication over a TCP connection or when using an Ethernet RS232 converter: There is no TCP connection or the data transfer cannot be completed within the set time limit. Make sure that the connected TCP partner is correctly configured and ready to receive. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 336 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Message Value (onboard PROFINET diagnostics) Value (TCP/IP and RS232) Value Value (Ident (FB45, error_MOBY) profile, STATUS byte) Description How to remedy the problem (byte 0, byte 1, byte 2) Error W#16#500E 14 0C E1, FE, 01 Error in communication over the archiving connection: There is no TCP connection, the server does not respond within the set time limit or violates the archiving protocol. Check the connection to the server. Make sure that the data is processed by the server in an adequately short time and that the protocol is maintained. Error - lamp overload W#16#500F 15 10 E4, FE, 06 The connected lamp was overloaded. The selected or default "Maximum duty cycle" from Options/Lighting was exceeded. Reduce the trigger frequency, reduce the exposure time or use a more powerful lamp. Reserved program number error W#16#5010 16 02 E6, FE, 04 You are attempting to save program number 15 via digital I/O or PROFINET IO. This number cannot be saved via these interfaces. Select a program number of between 1 and 14 or user another interface to save program number 15. Error PROFINET IO error W#16#5011 17 - - Error in PROFINET Make sure that the IO communication parameters for communication over PROFINET IO and the communication partners are correctly configured and active. Check the connection to the I/O controller. Error internal file error W#16#5005 05 13 E4, FE, 04 An error occurred while saving to read-only memory. Archiving/ MMI communication Please contact technical support if this error occurs frequently. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 337 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Self-acknowledging connection errors The following connection errors are self-acknowledging: Error - TCP communication Error - archiving/MMI communication Error - PROFINET IO error As soon as the connection is re-established after an interruption, the reader exits the error status and returns to the mode prior to the occurrence of the error, for example back to processing mode. The occurrence of these errors and their automatic acknowledgement are stored in the diagnostic data records and are not overwritten by new errors. If such entries exist, this is indicated on the user interface in the "Run" and "Information/Statistics" tasks. Note PROFINET IO error/OB 86 not programmed * The occurrence of a PROFINET IO error causes OB 86 (rack failure OB) to be called on a SIMATIC S7 CPU. * Unless you have programmed OB86, the CPU changes to STOP. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 338 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information 11.2.2 Warnings and notes Error messages for "normalization": Error code 2 Error message Normalization failed! No adequately bright image could be set. Remedy: 3 * Set a larger aperture on the lens. * Increase the maximum exposure time and brightness. * Use a brighter light source. Normalization failed! The dynamic range of the image brightness is too small. Remedy: 4 * Make sure the position of the frame is correct. * Select a smaller aperture on the lens. * Reduce surrounding brightness. Normalization failed! Not enough memory. Remedy: * 5 Restart the reader. Normalization failed! An adequate dynamic range can only be achieved with an illuminated image. Remedy: 6 * Make sure the position of the frame is correct. * Select a smaller aperture on the lens. * Reduce surrounding brightness. Normalization failed! No valid setting found. Remedy: 8 * Change the aperture on the lens. * Reduce the maximum exposure time and brightness. * Use a different light source. Normalization failed! Error when saving. Remedy: * Delete a saved program. * Firmware update on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 339 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error messages for "calibration" Error code 18 Error message Calibration was not successful! The cell scaling could not be identified. Remedy: * 19 Use the Siemens calibration card. Calibration was not successful! The contrast parameters could not be taken as valid. Remedy: 20 * Repeat the normalization step using a tighter frame. * Restore the conditions used for normalization. Calibration was not successful! The code could not be read. Remedy: * 21 Make sure the position of the code is correct. Calibration was not successful! Not enough memory. Remedy: * 24 Restart the reader. Calibration was not successful! Error when saving. Remedy: * Delete a saved program. * Firmware update on the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 340 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information 11.2.3 Read results Cons. no. Message Description How to remedy the problem 1 Read error (<reason>) The processing was not successful in For possible causes, refer to "Read and processing mode. verification error messages" for the error messages. 2 Filter error (<reason>) The selected result string filtering was not possible with the read code. 1. Check whether the code just read is correct. 2. Check and, if necessary, correct the selected result settings in the decoder step in the "Result" tab. 3 Match error(<read result> ! <Match string>) * * 4 Format error(<reason>) The configured comparison option 1. The code or plain text that has just been read deviates from the trained was not found in the code to be code (and is therefore incorrect), or the compared. wrong code was trained. The string defined for training 2. Check the selected result settings. does not match the current string of the code or the plain text. The configured format text does not match the definition. Check the selected settings. You can find additional information in "Overall result" in the online help. The undefined formatting command is issued as <reason>. Note Changing error texts Please note that the error texts on the "Results" tab (results step) under "Programs" can change. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 341 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information 11.2.4 Read and verification error messages If there is a read error or verification error, the following error codes or English message strings are output. For further information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help. Note The causes of error 4700 to 4722 are also output in the verification report if there is a verification error All verification grades are output in the report as "E". The verification values correspond to the error code. Note Evaluating verification errors as read errors If the "Evaluate quality 'Poor' as 'N_OK'" check box has been selected in the decoding settings, a verification error will also be evaluated as 'N_OK'. Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 0001 No 1D/2D code found in step n No code found in step #n. 0002 Cycletime too short The processing was not completed within the cycle time limit. 0003 Trigger too fast The processing was interrupted by a trigger signal. 0004 Non ECC200 Code in step n Data matrix code found in step #n that does not comply with ECC200. Note The check for ECC200 is performed only in adjustment mode and during "Save program". 0005 Step n: Structured Append DMC not supported A DMC type "Structured Append" was found in step n. This DMC type is not supported. 0006 Step n: Reader Programming DMC not supported A DMC type "Reader Programming Code" was found in step #n. This DMC type is not supported. 0007 Step n: QR ECI encoding not supported A QR code with "ECI encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0008 Step n: QR Byte encoding not supported A QR code with "Byte encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0009 Step n: QR Kanji encoding not supported A QR code with "Kanji encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0010 Step n: Structured Append QR code not supported A QR type "Structured Append" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0011 Step n: QR FNC1 encoding not supported A QR code with "FNC1 encoding" was found in step #n. This QR type is not supported. 0012 Quality is poor in step n A code with the quality evaluation "Poor" was read in verification mode in step #n. 0013 Nothing found "Scan" or "Autotrigger edge triggered" mode: All image acquisitions were decoded without result. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 342 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 0014 Only m of the expected number of 1D/2D codes found in step n Only m instead of the expected number of codes was found in step # n with multicode decoding. 0015 Maximum number of codes per image (m) exceeded in step n More than the maximum number of codes were found with multicode decoding (per image: 50 (MV440 UR: 150)). 0016 Exceeded maximum decodable data length in code m of step n A maximum of 3001 bytes can be decoded per step. This amount was exceeded for code #m in step #n. 1006 No Text found in step n OCR: No text found in step #n. 1007 Text too short in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is shorter than the configured minimum. 1008 Text too long in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is longer than the configured maximum. 1009 Quality too low in step n OCR: The text found in step #n is below the configured quality threshold. 1010 Match failure in step n OCR: The match performed in step #n was not successful. 1011 Missing preknowledge for step n OCR: There is no string specification available for step #n. 4700 Verification Process Error in step n "Siemens DPM" verification reports: Not enough space around the data matrix code in step #n. 4701 Verification Unsupported in step n The selected verification method is not supported for the code type found in step #n. 4709 Mean light out of range in step n "AIM DPM" verification reports: Average brightness value is out of range (70% ... 86%) in step #n. 4710 ISO Verification ECC200 required in step n Verification according to "ISO15415" and "AIM DPM" does not support data matrix codes that are not ECC200. The error occurred in step #n. 4711 ISO Verification aperture too small in step n The cell size of a data matrix code in step #n is too large for the set aperture. 4712 ISO Verification aperture too large in step n The cell size of a data matrix code in step #n is too small for the set aperture. 4713 ISO Verification insufficient space in step n "ISO15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports: Not enough space around the data matrix code in step #n 4714 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F1 in step n "ISO 15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports an error during the reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 in step f), 1 to 6 for page 1. The error occurred in step #n. 4715 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F2 in step n "ISO 15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports an error during the reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 in step f), 1 to 6 for page 2. The error occurred in step #n. 4716 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP F3 in step n "ISO 15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports an error during the reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 in step f) 7. The error occurred in step #n. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 343 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information Error code (%c) Message (%s) Description 4717 ISO Verification failed RDA STEP A E in step n "ISO 15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports an error during the reference decoding according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 in step a) to e). The error occurred in step #n. 4718 ISO Verification failed RDA final image adjustment in step n "AIM DPM" verification reports an error in the final adjustment of the image. The error occurred in step #n. 4719 ISO Verification failed RDA error correction in step n "ISO15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports: Error correction in reference decoding algorithm according to ISO/IEC 16022:2006 failed. The error occurred in step #n. 4720 ISO Verification DM Row/Column too large in step "ISO15415" or "AIM DPM" verification reports: A data n matrix larger than 104 x 104 is not supported. The error occurred in step #n. 4721 ISO Verification cell size smaller than Min X in step n 4722 ISO Verification cell size larger than Max X in step "AIM DPM" verification reports: Cell size is larger that n the configured "Max. X" dimension. The error occurred in step #n. 11.2.5 "AIM DPM" verification reports: Cell size is smaller than the configured "Min. X" dimension. The error occurred in step #n. Filter error messages If there is a filter error, the following message strings are displayed in English. For further information, please refer to "Overall results" in the online help. Error text (%s) For filter mode only Description Symbol does not use GS1encoding GS1 The code read does not begin with the GS1 start symbol "]d2". "[Number]" is no valid GS1 Application Identifier GS1 The string selected in the "Filter ID" box contains an invalid application identifier tag. GS1 Application Identifier "[Number]" not found in symbol content GS1 An application identifier specified in the "Filter ID" box was not found in the read code. Symbol content shorter than given "start position" Position The read code is shorter than the selected "Start position" ID or separator not found in symbol content ID An ID (field: "Filter ID") or a separator character (field: "Separators") was not found in the read code. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 344 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.2 Reporting diagnostics information 11.2.6 Error messages when writing a trigger-synchronized match string (XMATCH) Apart from protocol errors in the structure of the XMATCH command (Page 311), the following errors are logged in the diagnostics data records as temporary errors (selfacknowledging). Error message in the diagnostics data records Error XMATCH command discarded. Permanent The image acquisition control is set to "Auto trigger". flag and Trg-ID: 0 expected. An XMATCH command was received that: * (1) does not have a permanent flag. * (2) has a trigger ID 0. XMATCH command discarded. Permanent An XMATCH command with the trigger ID 0 but without flag mandatory for Trg-ID: 0. a permanent flag was received. XMATCH buffer full. Matchstring discarded The received match string cannot be buffered. (Trg-ID: [TrgId], Program No: [Program The inability to buffer can have two reasons: number], Step No: [Step number], * (1) The trigger ID sent is more than 20 triggers Matchstring Idx: [Matchstring Index]). (SIMATIC MV420: 10 triggers) away from the current counter. Note XMATCH commands with a permanent flag can contain any trigger ID. Permanent settings can, however, only be buffered for a maximum of two different trigger IDs. If a further permanent setting is received, the last sent setting is overwritten. * (2) The total size of all stored match strings exceeds 200 KB (SIMATIC MV420: 100 KB). XMATCH command discarded. Program An XMATCH command has been received whose No: [Program number] is not active or does program number refers to a program which: not use match. * (1) Is not active * (2) Was saved with match "Off" (decoder) or without a string specification (OCR). XMATCH command discarded. String for Trg-ID: [TrgId] does not fit match settings for step no: [Step number], Matchstring Idx: [Matchstring Index] in program no: [Program number] An XMATCH command was received with a match string that cannot be processed with the selected match option (decoder) or string specification type (OCR). XMATCH command discarded. Program sequence is active. Program sequence mode is active. In this mode, no XMATCH commands can be used. Example Match "Position" with start position 10, but the match string that was sent only has 9 characters. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 345 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs 11.3 Diagnostics by evaluating the POWER, ETHERNET, STATE/SF LEDs LED labeling Meaning POWER * GREEN, flashing: Signals the startup phase after turning the reader on. Wait until this is completed and the reader is operational. * GREEN, lit permanently: Reader is ready for operation No error. * Permanently off: No Ethernet connection to the reader. * Check the connection to the Ethernet cable. * Check whether the connected switch or other communications partner is operational. * Check or replace the Ethernet cable. ETHERNET STATE/SF How to remedy the problem * GREEN, permanently on: An Ethernet connection exists without data traffic. To start the user interface of the reader, you also require a valid network configuration for TCP/IP. Here, you can, for example, use the Primary Setup Tool to create a valid network configuration for TCP/IP. * GREEN flashing: The reader is exchanging data. No error. * Off permanently: The reader is in "Stop" mode (no error) No error. * GREEN on permanently: The reader is in RUN mode (no error) No error. * RED, lit constantly: The reader is in the "Group error" status Possible cause when working with onboard PROFINET IO: Start the user interface to display the error message. Follow the suggested remedies, see section "Error messages (Page 334)". 1. Bus error (no physical connection to a subnet / switch). 2. Wrong transmission speed, Full duplex transmission is not enabled. * RED, flashing When using onboard PROFINET IO: * Check whether the IP address or device name occurs more than once in the network. 1. Bus communication is interrupted. * Check the settings of the I/O controller. 2. The IP address is incorrect. 3. Bad configuration. 4. Bad parameter assignment. 5. Bad or missing device name. 6. I/O controller does not exist / turned off. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 346 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.4 I/O device diagnostics 11.4 I/O device diagnostics 11.4.1 Introduction Errors, for example, "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", trigger I/O device diagnostics. The diagnostic information is read out using STEP 7 depending on the I/O controller. How to read out I/O device diagnostic information and how it is structured is described briefly below. You will find a detailed description in the programming manual PROFINET IO - From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. 11.4.2 Reading out diagnostics information with S7 If, for example, the error "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO" occurs on the reader and you are using an S7 CPU as the I/O controller, the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB82) is started on the I/O controller. Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have the following values: Variable Value Meaning OB_82_EV_CLASS B#16#39 Event entering state OB_82_MDL_DEFECT TRUE Module problem OB_82_EXT_FAULT TRUE External problem Unfortunately, you cannot identify the actual cause of the problem in the local variables of OB82. You can find this out as follows: With PROFINET IO: By calling SFB 54 "RALRM" in OB 82 The entry "Faulty module" appears in the diagnostics buffer and the corresponding text from the GSD file, for example "Error - transfer error PROFINET IO", appears in the module information of the reader. After the error has been eliminated and you have acknowledged it in the user interface of the reader, the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB82) is started again on the I/O controller. Its local variables OB_82_EV_CLASS, OB_82_MDL_DEFECT and OB82_EXT_FAULT have the following values: Variable Value Meaning OB_82_EV_CLASS B#16#38 Event exiting state OB_82_MDL_DEFECT FALSE No module problem OB_82_EXT_FAULT FALSE No external problem The entry "Module OK" now appears in the diagnostics buffer. The text from the GSD file relating to the previous error no longer appears in the module information of the reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 347 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.4 I/O device diagnostics 11.4.3 Diagnostics with PROFINET IO SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the TINFO parameter (task information): Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 19 See OB description Start information of the OB in which SFB 54 was called. 20 ... 21 Depends on the configuration Address: 22 23 24 25 B#16#08 B#16#00 B#16#00 / B#16#01 B#16#01 / B#16#00 * Bit 0 ... 10: Station number (according to configuration) * Bit 11 ... 14: I/O system ID (according to configuration) * Bit 15: 1 * Bit 0 ... 3: Slave type: 1000 = PNIO * Bit 4 ... 7: Profile type: 0000 * Bit 0 ... 3: Alarm info type: 0000 * Bit 4 ... 7: Structure version: 0000 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module: * Bit 0 = 0: Alarm from an integrated interface module * Bit 0 = 1: Alarm from an external interface module * Bits 1 ... 7: all 0 Flags of the PNIO controller interface module: * Bit 0 = 1 with incoming alarm * Bit 0 = 0 with outgoing alarm * Bits 1 ... 7: all 0 26 ... 27 W#16#8111 PNIO device ident number (fixed). 28 ... 29 W#16#002A Vendor ID (fixed). 30 ... 31 W#16#0001 Identification number of the instance. SFB 54 "RALRM" returns the following diagnostics information with PROFINET IO in the AINFO parameter (additional alarm information): Note When an alarm exits the alarm state, only bytes 0 to 25 of the AINFO parameter are written. Compare the meaning of bytes 2 and 3 of AINFO. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 348 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.4 I/O device diagnostics Diagnostics data record SFB 54 Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 1 according to PNIO standard Block type 2 ... 3 W#16#001A / W#16#0016 Length of the diagnostics data with an incoming / outgoing alarm. 4 ... 5 W#16#0100 Version (fixed) 6 ... 7 W#16#0001 / W#16#000C ID for the alarm type: Diagnostics alarm incoming / diagnostics alarm outgoing. 8 ... 11 DW#16#00000000 API (fixed) 12 ... 13 W#16#0000 Slot (fixed) 14 ... 15 W#16#0001 Subslot (fixed) 16 ... 19 DW#16#00000300 Module identification (fixed) 20 ... 23 DW#16#00000000 Submodule identification (fixed) 24 ... 25 W#16#Bxxx / W#16#xxx Alarm specification for incoming / outgoing alarm: * Bits 0 to 10: Sequence number * Bit 11: Channel diagnostics: 0 (fixed) * Bit 12: Status of vendor-specific diagnostics * Bit 13: Status of diagnostics for submodule * Bit 14: Reserved: 0 * Bit 15: Diagnostics status 26 ... 27 W#16#0004 ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed). 28 ... 29 Value from the table under error messages ID of the error that occurred. In contrast to events-related reading out of the diagnostics data with SFB 54, there is also the option of reading out the diagnostics data status-related. You read out status-related diagnostics data using SFB 52 "RDREC". Calling SFB 52: 1. You assign the diagnostics address of the reader to the ID parameter in hexadecimal format. 2. Assign the value 2 to the INDEX parameter. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 349 Alarm, fault and system messages 11.4 I/O device diagnostics Diagnostics data record SFB 52 Byte Value Meaning 0 ... 1 W#16#0010 Data record type: Diagnostics data record 2 ... 3 W#16#0012 Data record length starting at byte 4: 18 bytes 4 ... 5 W#16#0100 Version 6 ... 7 W#16#0000 Slot 8 ... 9 W#16#0000 Subslot 10 ... 11 W#16#0000 Channel 12 B#16#08 / B#16#10 Error occurred / no error occurred 13 B#16#05 Identifier indicating that all variables are stored in words starting at byte 14. 14 ... 15 W#16#0004 ID for vendor-specific diagnostics (fixed) 16 ... 17 W#16#0000 Channel number 18 ... 19 W#16#0805 / W#16#1005 Content identical to that of bytes 12 and 13. 20 ... 21 Value from the table under error messages ID of the error that occurred. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 350 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Service and maintenance 12.1 12 Maintenance and repair Maintenance The devices are maintenance-free. Cleaning is unnecessary. Siemens AG nevertheless recommends that you carefully clean the protective lens cover if it becomes dirty, to ensure consistent reading performance. Repair If you send in a reader to Siemens AG for repair, do not send the protective lens cover, lighting unit or other accessories. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 351 Service and maintenance 12.1 Maintenance and repair SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 352 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 13 Technical data 13.1 General technical specifications Mechanical environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Mechanical environmental conditions for operation SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 are designed for fixed installation in an environment protected from the weather and meet the conditions for use complying with DIN IEC 60721-3-3: * Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements); * Class 3K3 (climatic environmental conditions). Mechanical environmental conditions, sine-shaped oscillations Frequency range in Hz Test values 10 f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude 58 f < 500 1 g constant acceleration Test for mechanical environmental conditions Test for / test standard Comments Vibrations * Vibration test according to IEC 60068-2-6 (sinusoidal) * Vibration type: Frequency cycles with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. - 10 Hz f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm - 58 Hz f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g - 10 Hz f 55 Hz, amplitude 1 mm (only sensor head and lighting unit) Vibration duration: 10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the 3 mutually perpendicular axes. Test for / test standard Comments Shock Shock test according to IEC 60068-2-29 * Type of shock: Half-sine * Strength of the shock for the reader: * - 10 g peak value - 16 ms duration Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the 3 mutually perpendicular axes SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 353 Technical data 13.1 General technical specifications Climatic environmental conditions for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Table 13- 1 Ambient climatic conditions for operation Ambient conditions Permitted range Temperature 0 ... +50 C Temperature change Max. 10 C/h Relative humidity max. 95 % at +25 C Comments No condensation, corresponds to relative humidity degree 2 to IEC 61131-2. Transportation and storage of SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Transportation and storage of modules SIMATIC MV440 exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 for transportation and storage conditions. The following information applies to modules transported or stored in their original packaging. The climatic conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transportation. The mechanical conditions correspond to IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2. Conditions Permitted range Free fall 1 m (up to 10 kg) Temperature -30 to +70 C Atmospheric pressure 660 ... 1080 hPa, corresponds to a height of 0 ... 3500 m Relative humidity (at +25 C) 5 to 95%, no condensation Sine-shaped oscillations complying with IEC 60068-2-6 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm Shock complying with IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks 9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Power supply for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Power supply Supply voltage (UN) 24 ; (19.2 V DC ...28.8 V DC, safety extra low voltage, SELV). Fuse Max. 4 A Safety requirements complying with IEC 61131-2 corresponds to DIN EN 61131-2 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 354 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Technical data 13.1 General technical specifications Electromagnetic compatibility for SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Electromagnetic compatibility Pulse-shaped interference Interference Test voltage Corr. to severity Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 * Air discharge: * Contact discharge: Burst impulses (fast transient interference) according to IEC 61000-4-4 * 2 kV (power supply cable) * 2 kV (signal line) 8 kV 6 kV 3 3 Surge complying with IEC 61000-4-5 Coupling Test voltage Corr. to severity Asymmetrical 2 kV (power supply cable) direct voltage with protective elements 3 Symmetrical 1 kV (power supply cable) direct voltage with protective elements 3 Sine-shaped interference RF interference (electromagnetic fields) Test values Corr. to severity Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 80 % amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the range from 80 to 1000 MHz 3 Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m at 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz 3 RF interference on cable/cable shields Test values Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 Test voltage 10 V at 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the range from 9 kHz to 80 MHz Corr. to severity 3 Emission Limit class * Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1; * Emitted interference via the AC input power supply according to EN 55011: Limit class A, group 1. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 355 Technical data 13.2 Technical specifications of the reader 13.2 Technical specifications of the reader SIMATIC MV440 Reader Image acquisition * CCD chip 1/3", 640 x 480, square pixels; full-frame shutter * CCD chip 1/3", 1024 x 768, square pixels; full-frame shutter * CCD chip 1/1.8", 1600 x 1200, square pixels; full-frame shutter Image data transfer Triggered and automatic image acquisition Casing Die-cast aluminum Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 65 x 122 x 55 Weight * Approx. 0.45 kg (without protective lens cover) * Approx. 0.55 kg (without protective lens cover) Degree of protection IP 67 to IEC 60529 Supply voltage, current consumption * Type of supply voltage DC * Supply voltage from: 24 V DC 20 % * - M16 Power/IO connector - M12 ASM connector Supply voltage from: - 48 V DC, (min. 36 V DC, max: 57 V DC) Power over Ethernet according to IEEE802.3af (PoE), however only phantom power Current consumption (without I/O signals) * 24 V DC: Maximum 270 mA * PoE: Maximum 135 mA * Making current (at 24 V DC) I1 max. 2 A; < 1 ms * Power down bridging time (at 24 V DC) 10 ms * Power over Ethernet (PoE) * Powered Device (PD) Type 1, class 2 (6.49 W) * Type of supply Phantom power (IEEE 802.af) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 356 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Technical data 13.2 Technical specifications of the reader Digital output signals*) OUTPUT1 ... OUTPUT5 floating and proof against short circuit With max. load current: 50 mA Max. short-circuit current 240 mA Delays switching on and off 0 ... 2 ms *) All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal. Input signals*) INPUT1: * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal 6 K 15 ... 30 V 2 ... 5 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 1.4 mA INPUT2 ... INPUT5: * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal *) 16 K 15 ... 30 V 0.6 ... 2 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 0.3 mA All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal. Strobe signal *) Fast strobe output Max. load current at 24 V DC: *) 25 mA All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 357 Technical data 13.2 Technical specifications of the reader SIMATIC MV420 Reader Image acquisition * Image data transfer Triggered image acquisition Casing Die-cast aluminum Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 53 x 86 x 40 Weight * CMOS chip 1/3", 768 x 480 (640 x 480), square pixels; global shutter approx. 0.25 kg Degree of protection IP 67 to IEC 60529 Input voltage range: 24 V DC 20 % Max. power consumption at 24 V DC: 170 mA (without I/O signals) Starting current I1 max. 2 A; < 1 ms Power down bridging time (at 24 V DC): 10 ms Digital output signals*) OUTPUT2 ... OUTPUT3 floating and short-circuit proof With max. load current: 50 mA Max. short-circuit current 240 mA Delays switching on and off 0 ... 2 ms *) All values of the output signals are relative to the OUTPUT_COMMON signal. Input signals*) INPUT1 (trigger): * Input resistance at 24 V DC * Input voltage for "1" signal * Input current for "1" signal * Input voltage for "0" signal * Input current for "0" signal *) 6 K 15 ... 30 V 2 ... 5 mA 0 ... 5 V 0 ... 1.4 mA All values of the input signals are relative to the INPUT_COMMON signal. Strobe signal *) Fast strobe output Max. load current at 24 V DC: *) 25 mA All values of the strobe signal are relative to chassis ground of the power supply. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 358 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Technical data 13.3 Technical specifications of the interfaces 13.3 Technical specifications of the interfaces SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 Power IO RS232 interface % $ / . & + ' ( 0 ) * Figure 13-1 Plug pin assignment Table 13- 2 Power I/O RS232 cable, order number 6GF3440-8BA2 Power IO RS232 interface (socket) Connection Wire color SIMATIC MV440 signal SIMATIC MV420 signal H Red 24 V 24 V G Blue 0V 0V K Violet INPUT1 (trigger) INPUT1 (trigger) D Yellow INPUT2/ OUTPUT2 OUTPUT2 L Gray/pink INPUT3/ OUTPUT3 OUTPUT3 C Green INPUT4/ OUTPUT4 ASM TxD_N B Brown INPUT5/ OUTPUT5 ASM TxD_P A White INPUT_COMMON INPUT_COMMON E Gray OUTPUT_COMMON OUTPUT_COMMON J Black Strobe Strobe F Pink RS232 TxD RS 232 TxD or ASM RxD_P M Red/blue RS232 RxD RS232 RxD or ASM RxD_N Power interface Table 13- 3 MV400 push-pull power cables with order numbers 6GF3400-1BH20 and 6GF3400-0BH15 Power interface (socket) Connection Wire color Signal H Red/orange 24 V G Black/brown 0V SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 359 Technical data 13.3 Technical specifications of the interfaces Ethernet port Table 13- 4 Ethernet interface (socket) Ethernet interface (socket) Connection Name Function 1 TxDP Send data + 2 RxD_P Received data + 3 TxDN Send data - 4 RxD_N Received data - SIMATIC MV440 ASM interface Table 13- 5 ASM interface (socket) ASM interface (socket) Connection Name Function 1 24V 24 V DC supply voltage 2 TXD_N Send data - 3 0V Ground 4 TXD_P Send data + 5 RXD_P Received data + 6 RXD_N Received data - 7 Not connected - 8 Shield - SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 360 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 14 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 reader 0 [ 0 [ SIEMENS SIMATIC MV440 LED2 LED1 STATE/BF ETHERNET POWER Protective cap for lens screw connection Power IO RS-232 socket Ethernet socket LED displays ASM socket Figure 14-1 Dimension drawing: SIMATIC MV440 reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 361 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV420 reader Swivel lens and lamp protection LED displays Figure 14-2 Ethernet socket Power IO RS-232 socket Dimension drawing: SIMATIC MV420 reader SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 362 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 with lighting unit and mounting plate Ring light holder (external) Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 Socket for lighting unit Reader Reader mounting plate Torx screws M4x8 IP65 protective lens cover 50 Figure 14-3 Dimension drawing: SIMATIC MV440 with attached lighting unit and mounting plate SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 363 Dimension drawings Lighting unit SIMATIC Vision Sensor VS100 0 [ Figure 14-4 Dimension drawing: Lighting unit SIMATIC MV440 ring light holder Figure 14-5 Dimension drawing: Ring light holder SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 364 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 mounting plate 0 Figure 14-6 Dimension drawing: Mounting plate SIMATIC MV420 mounting plate with mounting bracket Figure 14-7 Dimension drawing of mounting plate with mounting bracket SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 365 Dimension drawings SIMATIC MV440 protective lens housing Figure 14-8 Dimension drawing: Protective lens cover 50 mm Dimension drawing: Protective lens cover 65 mm; metal/glass 0[ Figure 14-9 Figure 14-10 Dimension drawing: Protective lens cover 65 mm; plexiglass Built-in ring light SIMATIC MV440 Figure 14-11 Built-in ring light 54 mm dimension drawing SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 366 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15 This section describes the components of the SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440 readers and their accessories. The readers can be ordered with various performance characteristics, for example with standard resolution or high resolution. Depending on the requirements and the application, the readers can be fitted with accessories. "SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440" This section details accessories for both types of reader (Page 370). "SIMATIC MV420" This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV420 readers (Page 374) only. "SIMATIC MV440" This section details accessories for SIMATIC MV440 readers (Page 380) only. 15.1 Readers Note Connecting cables are not supplied with the device The connecting cables required are not supplied with the device. The following tables list the order numbers of the full packages and the individual components. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 367 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.1 Readers Order number Reader Description 6GF3420-0AA20 SIMATIC MV420 SR-B * Basic unit with all essential functions * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one and two dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * IP67 * Light: red, lens: 6 mm * Expanded functionality * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * IP67 * Light: red, lens: 6 mm * Basic unit with all essential functions * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * No lighting, lens or lens cover (can be ordered separately) * Advanced functionality * Resolution of the reader 768 x 480 or 640 x 480 pixels * For one- and two-dimensional codes * Image field and distance variable * No lighting, lens or lens cover (can be ordered separately) * Resolution of the reader 640 x 480 pixels * For one and two dimensional codes * For OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 lens cover, PC-PC * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP40 (without order number 6GF34408AC118AC11 or 6GF3440-8AC21) * No lighting, no lens 6GF3420-0AA40 6GF3420-0AX20 6GF3420-0AX40 6GF3440-1CD10 SIMATIC MV420 SR-P SIMATIC MV420 SR-B Body SIMATIC MV420 SR-P Body SIMATIC MV440 SR SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 368 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.1 Readers Order number Reader Description 6GF3440-1GE10 SIMATIC MV440 HR * Resolution of the reader 1024 x 768 pixels * For one and two dimensional codes * For OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 lens cover, PC-PC * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP40 (without order number 6GF3440-8AC11 or 6GF3440-8AC21) * No lighting, no lens * Resolution of the reader 1600 x 1200 pixels * For one and two dimensional codes * for OCR and verification (license required) * Image field and distance variable * With PoE * D65 lens cover, PC-PC * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP40 (without order number 6GF3440-8AC11 or 6GF3440-8AC21) * No lighting, no lens 6GF3440-1LE10 SIMATIC MV440 UR SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 369 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.1 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 15.2.1.1 Further accessories You will find the accessories below: In catalog ID 10 On the Internet at SIMATIC Ident home page (http://www.siemens.com/ident) or Industry Mall Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall). Cables Ethernet/PROFINET - connectors fitted by user For ASM Lens accessories Lenses Filter Plug-in power unit for commissioning and testing Mechanical holders Holder for VS100 lamps Trimetal holders Lamps SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 370 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.1.2 External lighting units Note See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions You will find the exact dimensions in the dimension drawings in the Image Database (http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG. Lighting units for external lighting Order number External lamps Note 6GF9004-7BA01 LED ring light metal IR clear Short support brackets are supplied. 6GF9004-8DA01 6GF3440-8CD * Light source: 850 nm * Lighting distance: 500 mm ... 3000 mm * For SIMATIC VS100 * Protective lens cover - suitable dimensions (W x H x D): 116 x 116 x 42 mm * Degree of protection IP67D LED ring light metal red clear * Lighting distance: 500 mm ... 3000 mm * For SIMATIC VS100 * Protective lens cover - suitable dimensions (W x H x D): 116 x 116 x 42 mm * Degree of protection IP67 SIMATIC MV440 ring light holders for SIMATIC VS100 ring lamps order number: * 6GF9004-7BA01 * 6GF9004-8DA01 * Dimensions (W x H x D): 175 x 225 x 3 mm Short support brackets are supplied. Screws are supplied. Power supply unit Siemens recommends using the power supply unit to operate the external lighting unit: Order number Rail-mounted power supply unit Note 6GF9002-8PS SIMATIC VS100 DIN rail-mounted power supply unit for SIMATIC VS100 ring lamps order number: Recommended cable 10 m long. * 6GF9004-7BA01 * 6GF9004-8DA01 * Input voltage: 110 to 230 V AC * Output voltage: 16.5 V DC Order number: 3RX8000-0CC42-1AL0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 371 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.1.3 SIMATIC MV440 and MV420 documentation package Documentation package Order number Content Documentation CD SIMATIC MV420/SIMATIC MV440/ 6GF3440-8FA SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 product CD-ROM with the following content: All the documentation and program examples for SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 readers (1D, 2D, VCR and verifiers), operating instructions and compact operating instructions. For commissioning engineers and operators. * The SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 Product CD-ROM contains the documentation package SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 with: Operating Instructions SIMATIC MV440/SIMATIC MV420 in the languages: - German - English Compact operating instructions SIMATIC MV440 / SIMATIC MV420 in the languages: - German - English - Spanish - Italian - French - Chinese Online help in the languages: - German - English - Spanish - Italian - French - Chinese Sample programs for FB79 for communication over PROFINET IO Sample program for archiving of diagnostic information SIMATIC S7-300 Automation System, Installation Manual Primary Setup Tool Configuration Manual Generic station description file with corresponding bitmap files "GSDML-002A-0B03-MV440.bmp" and "GSDML-002A-0B08-MV420.bmp" for PROFINET. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 372 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Documentation downloads from the Internet SIMATIC MV420 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39620218/133300) SIMATIC MV440 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33391594/133300) SIMATIC Manual Collection on DVD SIMATIC Manual Collection (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/4073541) All manuals for S7-200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, ENGINEERING software, RUNTIME software, PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET, SIMATIC MACHINE VISION, SIMATIC SENSORS in 5 Languages Order number: 6ES7998-8XC01-8YE0 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 373 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.2 SIMATIC MV420 15.2.2.1 Fittings for mounting 15.2.2.2 Order number Fittings for mounting Note 6GF3420-0AC00-1AA0 Mounting plate for reader, SIMATIC MV420 W x H x D (in mm): 40 x 54 x 30, thickness of the plate: 2 mm Flexible use for threads in metric and inch dimensions. Reader lens Reader lenses supported Note SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P (order number 6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40) are supplied with the pre-mounted lens kit 6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0 (focal distance of 6 mm) and the red internal lamp 6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0. Order number Reader lenses Remark 6GF3420-0AC00-0LK0 MV420 LENS KIT 6 mm F/5.6 * Fixed focal distance (6 mm) * Fixed aperture (F/5.6) * MV420 protective tube * Fittings for mounting * IP67 * Fixed focal distance (16 mm) * Fixed aperture (F/4) * MV420 protective tube * Fittings for mounting * IP67 6GF3420-0AC00-1LK0 MV420 LENS KIT 16 mm F/4 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 374 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Field of vision depending on camera distance Note Values in the diagrams are subject to tolerances The values in the two diagrams have certain tolerances. X axis Height of field of vision (mm) Y axis Width of field of vision (mm) Diagonal Distance from camera to object (mm) For a focal distance of 6 mm < ; Figure 15-1 16:10 format SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 375 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories For a focal distance of 16 mm < Figure 15-2 15.2.2.3 ; 16:10 format Protective tube Order number Designation Note 6GF3420-0AC00-2AA0 MV420 protective tube, set of spares * 2 x MV420 protective tube * Fittings supplied SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 376 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.2.4 Built-in ring light Note SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P In the SIMATIC MV420 SR-B/P (6GF3420-0AA20, 6GF3420-0AA40), the integrated red MV420 ring light (6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0) is already fitted. Order number Ring light Note 6GF3420-0AC00-1LT0 Built-in MV420 red ring light for SIMATIC MV420 Fittings supplied Light source: Red/amber LED (618 nm) 6GF3420-0AC00-2LT0 Built-in MV420 white ring light for SIMATIC MV420 Fittings supplied Light source: LED white (425 to 610 nm) 6GF3420-0AC00-3LT0 Built-in MV420 IR ring light for SIMATIC MV420 Fittings supplied Light source: Infrared LED (888 nm) 15.2.2.5 Cables The SIMATIC MV420 reader is fitted with an industrial M12 plug and an M16 socket. The connectors have the following functions: M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable (plus ASM) Note Ordering information * Either one or two cables are required depending on the application. The cables are not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately. * There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to order one version per reader. M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 This cable connects the reader with a communications partner over Ethernet. Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service: Order number Ethernet cable Note 6XV1871-5TH20 Ethernet cable M12/RJ45 2 m Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers. * Fitted with M12 plug, 8-pin and RJ-45 plug * Length: 2 m Other 6XV1871-5... cables can be found in the new catalog, ID10 2013 and the Industry Mall. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 377 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation: Order number Length of Ethernet cable M12/M12-180 Note 6XV1870-8AE30 0.3 m * 6XV1870-8AE50 0.5 m 6XV1870-8AH10 1.0 m 6XV1870-8AH15 1.5 m Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two 4-pin M12 plugs (D-coded) 6XV1870-8AH20 2.0 m * Degree of protection IP65/67 6XV1870-8AH30 3.0 m 6XV1870-8AH50 5.0 m 6XV1870-8AN10 10 m 6XV1870-8AN15 15 m Special lengths with cable outlet Note Special lengths with 90 or 180 cable outlet You can order special lengths with a 90 or 180 cable outlet angle, at: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26999294) The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for example for an RJ-45 infrastructure: Order number IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 Note 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 Pack with 1 plug * 180 cable outlet 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 Pack with 10 plugs 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0 Pack with 50 plugs * For network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface Note More cables and connectors You will find other cables and connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 378 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories M16 - ASM cable This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can also be supplied via this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable. This cable is suitable only for the SIMATIC MV420. Order number Cables and connectors Note 6GF3420-0AC00-2CB0 2m Suitable for readers: * 6GF3420-0AA20 * 6GF3420-0AA40 * 6GF3420-0AX20 * 6GF3420-0AX40 M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS232 cable These cables are used for the camera voltage supply. The power I/O RS232 cable also has wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial interface. Order number Cables Note 6GF3400-0BH15 1.5 m MV400 push-pull power cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers 6GF3400-1BH20 6GF3440-8BA2 * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Prefitted push-pull * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS 232 * Length: 1.5 m 2 m MV400 push-pull power cable * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Open end * Push-pull connectors supplied * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS232 * Length: 2 m SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 power IO RS232 cable * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Open end * Length: 10 m * Lines for I/O and RS232 Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 379 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.3 SIMATIC MV440 15.2.3.1 Fittings for mounting 15.2.3.2 Order number Fittings for mounting Note 6GF3440-8CA Mounting plate for reader, SIMATIC MV440 W x H x D (in mm): 80 x 80 x 60, thickness of the plate: 4 mm Flexible use for metric and imperial threads. Reader lens Reader lenses supported Order number Reader lenses Comment 6GF9001-1BE01 Mini lens 8.5 mm, 1:1.5 PENTAX C815B(TH) * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 42 mm, L = 47 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 35.7 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 37.2 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 38.9 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 41.4 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 29.5 mm, L = 38 mm * Fixed focal distance * Aperture and focus adjustable * D = 34 mm, L = 63.6 mm 6GF9001-1BL01 6GF9001-1BF01 6GF9001-1BG01 6GF9001-1BH01 6GF9001-1BJ01 6GF9001-1BK01 Mini lens 12 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX H1214-M(KP) Mini lens 16 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX C1614-M(KP) Mini lens 25 mm, 1:1.4 PENTAX C2514-M(KP) Mini lens 35 mm, 1:1.6 PENTAX C3516-M(KP) Mini lens 50 mm, 1:2.8 PENTAX C5028-M(KP) Tele lens 75 mm, 1:2.8 PENTAX C7528-M(KP) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 380 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Finding the suitable lens and the size of the viewing window Note Configuration: necessary for finding the suitable lens The configuration is used to find the suitable lens. * Use the configuration table. You require the configuration table to find out which lens is suitable for SR, HR and UR readers. Table 15- 1 Configura tion I E T Configuration table Requirements Near field (from 7 to 80 cm) Far field (from 0.5 to 3 m) Lens cover 65, without internal lamp Lens cover 50 without internal lamp Components Order number Comment Built-in ring light red 6GF3440-8DA11 Built-in white ring light 6GF3440-8DA21 Built-in green ring light 6GF3440-8DA31 Protective lens cover 65 metal/glass 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens cover 65 metal/PMMA 6GF3440-8AC21 Protective lens cover 65 PC/PC 6GF3440-8AC12 External ring lamp Red light, clear 6GF9004-8DA01 Accessories for operating the external lamps: External ring lamp IR light, clear 6GF9004-7BA01 * 16.5 V power supply unit 6GF9002-8PS Protective lens cover 50 metal/glass 6GF9002-7AA * Protective lens cover 50 metal/PMMA 6GF9002-7AA01 External ring light holder 6GF3440-8CD * Connecting cable for the lamp, 10 m, 3RX8000-0CC42-1AL0 Protective lens cover 65 metal/glass 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens cover 65 metal/PMMA 6GF3440-8AC21 Protective lens cover 50 metal/glass 6GF9002-7AA Protective lens cover 50 metal/PMMA 6GF9002-7AA01 Compact variant, minimal cabling work required. PC = Polycarbonate PMMA = Polymethyl methacrylate Protects wide lenses Protects long lenses SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 381 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories SR reader The following table shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the SR readers (resolution 640 x 480 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm and a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 0,3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 121 90 I; (E; T) 0,4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 123 91 I; (E; T) 0,5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 152 114 I; (E; T) 0,6 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 182 136 I; (E; T) 0,7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 134 100 I; (E; T) 0,8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 153 115 I; (E; T) 0,9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 173 129 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 192 143 E; T 0,9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 126 94 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 140 105 E; T 1,1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 154 115 E; T 1,2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 167 125 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 181 135 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 194 145 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 117 87 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 126 94 E; T 1,5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 136 101 E; T 1,6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 145 108 E; T 1,7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 155 116 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 164 123 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 174 130 E; T 2 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 183 137 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 112 84 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 118 88 E; T 2,0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 125 93 E; T 2,1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 131 98 E; T 2,2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 137 103 E; T 2,3 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 163 122 E; T 2,4 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 163 122 E; T 2,5 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 163 122 E; T 2,6 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 163 122 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 382 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 2,7 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 169 126 E; T 2,8 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75;1:2,8 175 131 E; T 2,9 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 182 136 E; T 3,0 6GF9001-1BK01 + 6GF9001-1BV f = 75; 1:2,8 188 141 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 383 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories HR reader The following table shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for the HR readers (resolution 1024 x 768) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm and a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 0,3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 121 90 I; (E; T) 0,4 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 161 120 I; (E; T) 0,4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 123 91 I; (E; T) 0,5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 152 114 I; (E; T) 0,6 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 182 136 I; (E; T) 0,6 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 115 86 I; (E; T) 0,7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 134 100 I; (E; T) 0,8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 153 115 I; (E; T) 0,9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 173 129 E; T 1,0 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 192 143 E; T 0,9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 126 94 E; T 1,0 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 140 105 E; T 1,1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 154 115 E; T 1,2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 167 125 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 181 135 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 194 145 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 117 87 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 126 94 E; T 1,5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 136 101 E; T 1,6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 145 108 E; T 1,7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 155 116 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 164 123 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 174 130 E; T 2,0 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 183 137 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 112 84 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 118 88 E; T 2,0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 125 93 E; T 2,1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 131 98 E; T 2,2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 137 103 E; T 2,3 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 144 107 E; T 2,4 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 150 112 E; T 2,5 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 156 117 E; T 2,6 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 163 122 E; T 2,7 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 169 126 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 384 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object [in m] Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 2,8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 175 131 E; T 2,9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75;1:2,8 182 136 E; T 3,0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 188 141 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 385 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories UR readers The following table shows the suitable lens and the corresponding viewing window for a UR reader (resolution 1600 x 1200 pixels) for a data matrix code of the size 44 mm x 44 mm and a cell size of 1 mm. Distance lens front edge - object in m Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 0,2 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 121 91 I; (E; T) 0,3 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 177 133 I; (E; T) 0,4 6GF9001-1BL01 f = 12; 1:1,4 233 175 I; (E; T) Only suitable for distances of up to 0.5 m! 0,3 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 136 102 I; (E; T) 0,4 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 181 136 I; (E; T) 0,5 6GF9001-1BF01 f = 16; 1:1,4 226 170 I; (E; T) 0,5 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 142 107 I; (E; T) 0,6 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 169 127 I; (E; T) 0,7 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 197 148 I; (E; T) 0,8 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 225 169 I; (E; T) 0,9 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 253 190 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BG01 f = 25; 1:1,4 281 211 E; T 0,9 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 186 140 E; T 1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 206 155 E; T 1,1 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 226 170 E; T 1,2 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 246 185 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 266 200 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BH01 f = 35; 1:1,6 286 215 E; T 1,3 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 174 131 E; T 1,4 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 188 141 E; T 1,5 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 202 152 E; T 1,6 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 216 162 E; T 1,7 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 230 173 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 243 182 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 257 193 E; T 2 6GF9001-1BJ01 f = 50; 1:2,8 270 203 E; T 1,8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 170 128 E; T 1,9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 180 135 E; T 2,0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 190 143 E; T 2,1 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 200 150 E; T 2,2 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 210 157 E; T 2,3 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 219 164 E; T SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 386 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories Distance lens front edge - object in m Order number of the lens Focal distance of the lens [f in mm; light intensity] Image width in mm Image height in mm Configuration 2,4 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 227 171 E; T 2,5 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 236 177 E; T 2,6 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 246 185 E; T 2,7 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 256 192 E; T 2,8 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 265 199 E; T 2,9 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 275 207 E; T 3,0 6GF9001-1BK01 f = 75; 1:2,8 284 214 E; T 15.2.3.3 Protective lens cover Note See the dimension drawings in the image database for dimensions You will find the exact dimensions in the dimension drawings in the Image Database (http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/) of Siemens AG. A protective lens cover protects fitted C-mount lenses with a very low IP rating from influences such as water and oil. Two types of protective lens cover There are two types of protective lens cover available for the reader. Protective lens covers (diameter: 65 mm) which protect the lens and the internal lamp: - For built-in metal/glass lamps - For built-in plexiglass lamps Protective lens covers (diameter: 50 mm) for use with external lamps. This protective cover only protects the lens itself. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 387 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories For built-in lamps Order number 6GF3440-8AC11 Protective lens cover Note D65 lens cover, metal/glass * Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers 6GF3440-8AC21 - 6GF9001-1BL01 * Front pane: Glass - ...-1BF01 * Inner diameter: 57 mm - ...-1BG01 * Max. lens length: 57 mm - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 D65 lens cover, metal-PMMA Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers 6GF3440-8AC12 Suitable lenses (order number): e.g. * Suitable lamps (order number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 * Suitable lenses (order number): e.g. - 6GF9001-1BL01 * Front pane: PMMA - ...-1BF01 * Inner diameter: 57 mm - ...-1BG01 * Max. lens length: 57 mm - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 D65 lens cover Polycarbonate-polycarbonate * Suitable lamps (order number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 * Suitable lenses (order number): e.g. Degree of protection: IP67 for SIMATIC MV440 readers * Front panel: Polycarbonate * Inner diameter: 53 mm * Max. lens length: 57 mm * - 6GF9001-1BL01 - ...-1BF01 - ...-1BG01 - ...-1BH01 - ...-1BJ01 Suitable lamps (order number): 6GF3440-8DA1 W x H x D [mm]: 65 x 65 x 60 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 388 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories For external lamps Order number Protective lens cover Note 6GF9002-7AA Protective lens cover IP67 for VS100C/CS_MOUNT sensor head * 6GF9002-7AA01 Suitable lamps (order number): * Front pane: Glass - 6GF9004--7BA01 * Lenses with outer measurements: Diameter 41 mm/44.6 mm - -8DA01 * Length from mount: 65 mm, e.g. - 6GF9001-1BL01 - 6GF9001-1BF01 - 6GF9001-1BG01 - 6GF9001-1BH01 - 6GF9001-1BJ01 Protective lens cover IP67 for VS100C/CS_MOUNT sensor head * Suitable lamps (order number): * Front pane: PMMA (synthetic) - 6GF9004-7BA01 * Lenses with outer measurements: Diameter 41 mm/44.6 mm - -8DA01 * Length from mount: 65 mm, e.g. - 6GF9001-1BL01 - 6GF9001-1BF01 - 6GF9001-1BG01 - 6GF9001-1BH01 - 6GF9001-1BJ01 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 389 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.3.4 Built-in ring light Order number Ring light Note 6GF3440-8DA11 SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light red Fittings supplied: 6GF3440-8DA21 6GF3440-8DA31 * Light source: LED red (618 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m SIMATIC MV440 built-in ring light white * Light source: White LED (440 nm to 650 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m SIMATIC MV440 built-in green ring light * Light source: Green LED (513 nm to 543 nm) * Lighting distance up to 0.8 m * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP20 (without order number 6GF3440-8AC11 or 6GF3440-8AC21) Fittings supplied: * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP20 (without order number 6GF3440-8AC11) Fittings supplied: * IP67 (order numbers 6GF3440-8AC11 and 6GF3440-8AC21) * IP20 (without order number 6GF3440-8AC11 or 6GF3440-8AC21) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 390 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.3.5 Licenses Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows reading of plain text (OCR). Order number License Note 6GF3400-0SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers. It provides all functions of the TextGenius license 6GF3400-0SL01 plus adjustment of plain text reading (OCR) for customerspecific fonts. Order number License Note 6GF3400-1SL01 SIMATIC MV400 Text-Genius-Plus license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV400) This license is suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers and allows code verification. 15.2.3.6 Order number License Note 6GF3400-0SL02 SIMATIC MV400 Veri-Genius license Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers Calibration card The calibration card is required for reliable operation of the SIMATIC MV440 reader with verification functionality. The calibration card is supplied with the SIMATIC MV400 VeriGenius license 6GF3400-0SL02. Order number Calibration card Note 6GF3440-8CE (A5E02401759) Calibration card Suitable for all SIMATIC MV440 readers Dimensions (W x H x D): 45 x 70 x 75 mm SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 391 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories 15.2.3.7 PoE switch Note PoE functionality not available for older devices PoE functionality is not available for older devices with order numbers: * 6GF3440-0CD10 * * * * 6GF3440-0GE10 6GF3440-0CD11 6GF3440-0GE11 6GF3440-0CD21 The following "PoE switches" are suitable for supplying power to the SIMATIC MV440 readers via the Ethernet cable. Order number PoE switch Note 6GK5108-0PA00-2AA3 SCALANCE X108POE 6GK5308-2QG00-2AA2 SCALANCE X308-2M POE Suitable for SIMATIC MV440 readers with a PoE connector: 6GK5324-4QG00-1AR2 SCALANCE XR324-12M POE * 6GF3440-1CD10 * 6GF3440-1GE10 * 6GF3440-1LE10 6GK5324-4QG00-1HR2 6GK5324-4QG00-3AR2 SCALANCE XR324-4M POE 6GK5324-4QG00-3HR2 15.2.3.8 Cables SIMATIC MV440 readers are fitted with three M12 plugs / M16 sockets. The connectors have the following functions: M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 M12 - ASM cable M16 - Power IO RS-232 cable M16 - Power I/O cable Note Ordering information * Either one or all three cables are required depending on the application. The cables are not part of a complete package and must always be ordered separately. * There is more than one version of each cable type. In this case, you simply need to order one version per reader. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 392 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories M12 - Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45 This cable connects the reader with a communications partner over Ethernet. Due to its short length, the following cable is intended only for commissioning and service: Order number Ethernet cable Note 6XV1871-5TH20 Ethernet cable M12/RJ45 2 m Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers. * Fitted with M12 plug, 8-pin and RJ-45 plug * Length: 2 m Other 6XV1871-5... cables can be found in the new catalog, ID10 2013 and the Industry Mall. The following industrial cables are used for fixed installation: Order number Length of Ethernet cable M12/M12-180 Note 6XV1870-8AE30 0.3 m * 6XV1870-8AE50 0.5 m 6XV1870-8AH10 1.0 m 6XV1870-8AH15 1.5 m Prefitted IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two 4-pin M12 plugs (D-coded) 6XV1870-8AH20 2.0 m * Degree of protection IP65/67 6XV1870-8AH30 3.0 m 6XV1870-8AH50 5.0 m 6XV1870-8AN10 10 m 6XV1870-8AN15 15 m Special lengths with cable outlet Note Special lengths with 90 or 180 cable outlet You can order special lengths with a 90 or 180 cable outlet angle, at: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26999294) SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 393 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories The cables are supplied with M12 plugs fitted at both ends. When necessary, the cables can be shortened at the other end from the reader and fitted with the following connectors, for example for an RJ-45 infrastructure: Order number IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 Note 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 Pack with 1 plug * 180 cable outlet 6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0 Pack with 10 plugs 6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0 Pack with 50 plugs * For network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface Note More cables and connectors You will find other cables and connectors in the Siemens AG ordering system. M12 - ASM cable This cable is for connection to ASM devices such as RFC180C and ASM456. Power can also be supplied via this cable allowing the reader to be operated with only one cable. Order number Cables and connectors 6GT2891-0FH20 * SIMATIC RF300 plug-in cable * Length 2 m * SIMATIC RF300 plug-in cable * Length 5 m * SIMATIC RF300 plug-in cable * Length 10 m * SIMATIC RF300 plug-in cable * Length 20 m * SIMATIC RF300 plug-in cable * Length 50 m 6GT2891-0FH50 6GT2891-0FN10 6GT2891-0FN20 6GT2891-0FN50 Note Plug-in cable prefitted with connectors between ASM 456, RF170C, RF180C and reader or extension cable for ASM 456, RF170C and RF180C with MOBY D/E/I/U and SIMATIC RF300. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 394 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories M16 power cable / power I/O cable / power I/O RS232 cable These cables are used for the camera voltage supply. The power I/O RS232 cable also has wires for connecting digital inputs/outputs and the RS-232 serial port. Order number Cables Note 6GF3400-0BH15 1.5 m MV400 push-pull power cable Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers 6GF3400-1BH20 6GF3440-8BA2 * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Prefitted push-pull * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS 232 * Length: 1.5 m 2 m MV400 push-pull power cablex * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Open end * Push-pull connectors supplied * For power supply only, no I/O, no RS232 * Length: 2 m SIMATIC MV440/ SIMATIC MV420 power IO RS232 cable * M16 with connector prefitted at one end * Open end * Length: 10 m * Lines for I/O and RS232 Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers Suitable for all SIMATIC MV400 readers SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 395 Components of the product/spares/accessories 15.2 Accessories SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 396 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 A Appendix A.1 Service & Support Technical Support You can contact Technical Support for SIPLUS HCS systems as follows: Phone: + 49 (0) 911 895 5900 E-mail (mailto:technical-assistance@siemens.com) Internet: Online support request form: (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Contact partner If you have any further questions on the use of our products, please contact one of our representatives at your local Siemens office. The addresses are found on the following pages: On the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner) In Catalog CA 01 In the catalog ID 10 for Industrial identification systems Service & support for industrial automation and drive technologies You can find various services on the Support homepage (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support) of IA/DT on the Internet. There you will find the following information, for example: Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products. Relevant documentation for your application, which you can access via the search function in "Product Support". A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists. Your local contact for IA/DT on site. Information about on-site service, repairs, and spare parts. Much more can be found under "Our service offer". SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 397 Appendix A.1 Service & Support "Identification systems" home page For the latest general information about our identification systems, visit Identification systems home page (http://www.siemens.com/ident). Technical documentation on the Internet A guide to the technical documentation for the various products and systems is available on the Internet: SIMATIC Guide manuals (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal) Online catalog and ordering system The online catalog and the online ordering system can also be found on the Industry Mall Homepage (http://www.siemens.com/industrymall). Training center We offer appropriate courses to get you started. Please contact your local training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nuremberg. Phone: +49 (0) 180 523 56 11 ( 0.14 /min. from the German landline network, deviating mobile communications prices are possible) For information about courses, see the SITRAIN homepage (http://www.sitrain.com). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 398 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Appendix A.2 Directives and declarations A.2 Directives and declarations CE mark The SIMATIC MV420 and SIMATIC MV440 readers meet the requirements and protective aims of the following EU directive. EMC Directive The devices meet the requirements of the EU directive "89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility" (modified by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC) and are designed for use in an industrial environment in accordance with the CE mark. Area of application Industry Requirements Emission Immunity EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2001 Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity and corresponding documentation is available for the responsible authorities according to the above-mentioned EC Directive at the following address: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Industry Automation Sensors and Communication P.O.Box 4848 90437 NUERNBERG GERMANY Your marketing contact can provide these if requested. Installation guidelines The installation guidelines and safety notices specified in the documentation must be adhered to during commissioning and operation. DIN ISO 9001 certificate The quality assurance system of our entire product manufacturing process (development, production, and marketing) meets the requirements of DIN ISO 9001 (corresponds to EN29001: 1987). This was confirmed by DQS (Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifizierung von Qualitatsmanagementsystemen mbH). EQ-Net certificate number: 1323-01 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 399 Appendix A.2 Directives and declarations License agreement for supplied software The device is supplied with software installed. Please note the corresponding license agreements. EMC USA Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Shielded cables Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations. Modifications Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Conditions of operations This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CANADA Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numerique de la classe b est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada. AUSTRALIA This product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 3548 Norm (Class A). SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 400 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 ESD guidelines B Definition of ESD All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any electrostatic discharge. The electrostatic sensitive components/modules are commonly referred to as ESD devices. This is also the international abbreviation for such devices. ESD modules are identified by the following symbol: NOTICE ESD devices can be destroyed by voltages well below the threshold of human perception. These static voltages develop when you touch a component or electrical connection of a device without having drained the static charges present on your body. The electrostatic discharge current may lead to latent failure of a module, that is, this damage may not be significant immediately, but in operation may cause malfunction. Electrostatic charging Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings can be electrostatically charged. The figure below shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated. These values correspond to IEC 801-2 specifications. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 401 ESD guidelines 3RZHULQN9 N9 6\QWKHWLFPDWHULDO :RRO $QWLVWDWLFPDWHULDOIRUH[DPSOHZRRG RUFRQFUHWH Figure B-1 5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\LQ Electrostatic voltages on an operator Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge Ensure good equipotential bonding: When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, ensure that your body, the workplace and packaging are grounded. This prevents electrostatic charge. Avoid direct contact: As a general rule, only touch electrostatic sensitive devices when this is unavoidable (e.g. during maintenance work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this way, the discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices. Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 402 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 List of abbreviations and acronyms C Abbreviation/symbol Explanation Degrees C Degrees Celsius A Ampere (SI unit of electric current) AIM Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility ANSI American National Standards Institute - the name of the US institute for standardizing industrial processes etc. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASM Interface module, synonym of communication module STL Statement List BF Bus fault Bit Binary digit Byte Binary term (1 byte = 8 bits) approx. approximately CD Compact Disk CCD Charge Coupled Device CE Communautes Europeenes (French for European Communities) cm Square centimeter CPU Central Processing Unit CSV Character Separated Values DB Data block DC Direct Current DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DI Digital Input DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e. V. (German standards association) DISA Disable DMC Data Matrix Code DNS Domain Name System DO Digital Output DP Distributed Peripheral I/O DPM Direct Part Marking DVD Digital Versatile Disk EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility EN Europaische Norm (European standard) ES Product version SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 403 List of abbreviations and acronyms Abbreviation/symbol Explanation ESD Electrostatic Discharge FB Function Block FBD Function Block Diagram GND Ground GSD Generic Station Description IAQG International Aerospace Quality Group I/O Input/Output ISO International Standards Organization (from Greek: "isos": "equal") IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IP Internet Protocol or International Protection HF High Frequency H2S Hydrogen sulfide hPa Hectopascal HR High Resolution HTML Hypertext Markup Language HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol kg Kilogram LAD Ladder Diagram LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light emitting diode MAC Media Access Control max. Maximum MB = Mbit 106 bits MHz Megahertz mils milli-inches min Minute m Meter mm Square millimeter MTBF Mean operating Time Between Failures MTTR Mean Time To Recover LF Low Frequency OCR Optical Character Recognition OCV Optical Character Verification PC Personal Computer, a stationary single-user computer PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PG Programming device PIB Proxy Ident Function Block PROFIBUS Process Field Bus, international fieldbus standard to EN 50170/IEC 61158 PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (German technical inspectorate) RAM Random Access Memory SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 404 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 List of abbreviations and acronyms Abbreviation/symbol Explanation RFID standard profile Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB), synonym of Ident profile ROI Region Of Interest RH Relative Humidity Rps Reads per second RS Recommended Standard RS232 (also EIA-232) Identifies an interface standard for a sequential, serial data transmission. RS-422 (also EIA-422) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data transmission. RS-485 (also EIA-485) Identifies an interface standard for a differential, serial data transmission. ROM Read Only Memory Rx Receive (Rx) identifies a receiver s Second SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage SF Group error (German Sammelfehler) SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SO2 Sulfur dioxide PLC Programmable Logic Controller SR Standard Resolution t Time T Temperature TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol; a reference module for communication on the Internet Tx Transmit (Tx) identifies a transmitter URL Uniform Resource Locator V Volt (SI unit of potential difference) VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik (German Association for Electrical, Electronic and Information Technologies) WAN Wide Area Network XML EXtensible Markup Language e.g. for example SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 405 List of abbreviations and acronyms SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 406 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Glossary Actuator Component at the output section of a controlled system, which intervenes in energy or mass flows and causes changes. ASM Interface module, synonym of communication module. ASM 456 The ASM 456 communication modules are slave modules for operating components via PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1 on any controller. Automation system An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least a central processing unit, a variety of input and output modules as well as operator control and monitoring (HMI) devices. Bus A cable or conductor system used for data transfer among the components of a computer system. Buses are characterized by the number of bits they transfer at any one time. There are serial bus systems (one bit after the other) and parallel bus systems (multiple bits simultaneously over several lines). Communication module Communication modules can be used to integrate RFID readers and code reading systems into an automation system, e.g. PROFINET, PROFIBUS, or even ET 200pro distributed I/O. Integration is independent of the technology actually employed. The reader always communicates with the communication module via an RS-422 interface. Contour Solid line that runs completely along the border of an object, in other words, it consists solely of border points. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 407 Glossary Counter A counter registers the state changes (edges) of a digital signal. With each state change, the counter increases (increments) or decreases (decrements) a value that is then evaluated by SIMATIC S7 or a PLC. CSV file A CSV file is a text file for storage or for exchange of simply structured data; these files can be read, for example, with Microsoft Excel. CustomGUI A custom user interface that communicates with the reader via the Web API. Debouncing Permanent electrical contact does not occur immediately when electrical switching or key contacts are closed; the connection opens and closes several times within a fraction of a second. With digital input devices (computer keyboards, input controllers on keypads, etc.), this bouncing effect causes each occurrence of the contact to be registered as a separate input (multiple input). Since the discovery of the phenomenon, various hardware and software solutions have been developed. Counteracting this effect is known as debouncing (debouncing circuit or routine). DHCP client Each device with network capability that supports communication with a DHCP server to obtain dynamically leased IP configurations and other optional parameter information. DHCP server A computer on which the Microsoft DHCP service runs. This provides active DHCP clients with dynamic configuration of IP addresses and related information. Distortion Image error that becomes evident in the image of a rectangular grid where the straight lines are bent inwards or outwards. DNS server A hierarchically distributed database containing assignments of DNS domain names to various data types, such as IP addresses. DNS allows computers and services to be found based on user-friendly names and also allows other information stored in the database to be found. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 408 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Glossary Download In communications, to transfer a data copies from a remote computer to the requesting computer, for example, to send the operating system from a PC to a controller. D-sub Type identification for a connector. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A TCP/IP service protocol that allows dynamic configurations of host IP addresses for a certain time and distributes related configuration parameters to authorized network clients. DHCP provides safe and simple-to-use configuration of TCP/IP networks, prevents address conflicts and helps to restrict the number of IP addresses required in the network. DHCP uses a client/server model in which the DHCP server takes over central management of IP addresses used in the network. Clients with DHCP support can then request and obtain the lease of an IP address from a DHCP server when the network starts up. Endian Data is sometimes saved in a different order in certain computer architectures. Intel-based computers, for example, save the data differently from the Siemens controllers (S7), namely, in reverse sequence. The byte sequence from Intel, termed Little Endian, is therefore the reverse S7 byte sequence, Big Endian. The following applies to these two forms: Little Endian: The most significant byte is located at the right end of a word. Big Endian: The most significant byte is located at the left end of a word. Ethernet This is a specific type of local network that works according to a standard defined by Intel, DEC and Xerox. Firmware Software routines stored in the Read-Only Memory (ROM). Startup routines and local machine I/O commands are stored in firmware. In terms of user friendliness, firmware takes an intermediate position between software and hardware. Function Block Diagram Function Block Diagram is a graphic representation of control functions. Each control function has a corresponding symbol. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 409 Glossary Gateway This is a device that is connected to more than one physical TCP/IP network and can forward or distribute IP packets. A gateway translates various transport protocols or data formats (for example IPX and IP) and is included in networks mainly because of this translation function. Gateways are also known as IP routers. Host name The DNS name of a device on a network. These names are used to locate a computer in the network. Before a computer can be found, its host name must be listed in the host file or be known to a DNS server. On most computers running Windows, the host name and computer name are identical. HR HR stands for the resolution 1024x768 pixels (width to height ratio 4:3, 12:9) regardless of other parameters. Ident profile Implementation of the "Proxy Ident Function Block" (PIB) from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL for SIMATIC S7. Synonym of RFID standard profile. IP address A 32-bit address to identify a node in an IP network. Each node in the IP network is be assigned a unique IP address. This consists of the network ID and a unique host ID. This address is typically represented with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period (for example, 192.168.7.27). In this version of Windows, you can configure a static IP address or have it assigned dynamically by DHCP. Ladder diagram Graphic representation of the control functions based on circuit diagrams from contactor technology. The current paths are arranged horizontally one below the other and the symbols used are different. MAC address The MAC address is the hardware address for each network device (network card, switch , etc.) and is used for unique identification of the device in the network. The MAC address is burned into a chip and cannot normally be modified. Main ROI or ROI Region of Interest. The main ROI is the area with characteristics of the specimens relevant for image processing. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 410 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Glossary Master The device configured as master in a communications system passes on data to the device configured as slave. The master is always the active partner. MOBY-ASM The term MOBY-ASM covers all communication modules (ASM) that use the RFID industrial standard MOBY, for example SIMATIC RF180C or ASM 456. N type The load switches from 0 V to 24 V DC and the input is switched to 24 V DC. OCR OCR ("Ooptical Ccharacter Rrecognition") is a term from the IT sector and refers to automatic text recognition in images. This add-on feature enables the reader to detect and read human-readable plain text in an image in addition to machine-readable codes. OCV With the OCV ("Optical Character Verification"), the reader can compare the read plain text to target specifications and detect deviations in the reading result. The OCV function is very different from a printing inspection, which involves comparison of the printed image with a template. This task is not covered by the OCV function. P type The load switches from 24 V to 0 V DC and the input is switched to 0 V. Persistence Persistence is the ability to store data structures (or objects) in non-volatile memory such as file systems or databases. In other words, data is stored and retained on the reader if there is a power outage. PIB Proxy Ident Function Block from PROFIBUS INTERNATIONAL, order no. 3.142. Pick-and-place Loading and removal of parts. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 411 Glossary Ping A utility for checking connections to one or more remote hosts. The "ping" command uses the echo packets and echo replies of ICMP to check connectivity with an IP system in a network. Ping is useful in troubleshooting the IP network or the router. Port or port address Address for a channel for data transfer between an input or output device and the processor. From the CPU's perspective, a port represents one or more memory addresses to which it can send data or from which it can receive data. Special hardware such as expansion boards places data from a device in the memory addresses and sends data from these addresses to the device. Some ports are only for input and some only for output. Power over Ethernet (PoE) "Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is the name of a technology with which network devices can be supplied with power via the 8-wire Ethernet cable. The main advantage of "Power over Ethernet" is that the power supply cable is no longer necessary: Devices connected to Ethernet can be installed in less accessible areas or in areas in which large numbers of cables would be inconvenient. On the one hand, this means a drastic reduction of installation costs. On the other hand, a central uninterruptible power supply (USP) that is simple to implement increases the protection against failure of the connected devices. PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS-DP is used to control readers and actuators using a central controller in production engineering. It is also used in connection with "distributed intelligence", i.e. connecting multiple controllers to form a network. It provides data transmission up to 12 Mbps on twisted-pair cables and data transmission over sliding contacts for mobile subscribers in exceptional cases or optical data transmission in unobstructed space. PROFINET device A PROFINET IO system is made up of the following devices: An I/O controller is a controller or PC that controls automation tasks. An I/O device is a field device that is configured and controlled by an I/O controller. An I/O device is made up of several modules and submodules. I/O Supervisor is a development tool typically based on a PC that is used to assign parameters to and perform diagnostics on individual I/O devices, and to configure the entire plant. The I/O controller gets its data from the I/O Supervisor and configures the I/O device based on this. An application relation (AR) is formed between an I/O controller and I/O device. Communication relations (CR) with varying properties are specified for the transfer of parameters, cyclic data communication and alarm handling based on this AR. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 412 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Glossary The properties and options of an I/O device are described in a Generic Station Description (GSD) file. This file is written in GSDML (GSD Markup Language) - an extension of XML and is used as a planning tool to plan the configuration for PROFINET IO systems. PROFINET IO PROFINET IO (Input Output) is used for controlling readers and other actuators using a central controller in production engineering. Proxy A computer that receives broadcast name queries and answers to names that do not go to the local subnet. To evaluate the names, the proxy communicates with a WINS server and retains the names in the cache for a certain time. RF180C The RF180C communication module is a module for operating RFID components via PROFINET IO on any controller. RFID standard profile Synonym of Ident profile. Sensor In electrical engineering, a sensor is a component that can qualitatively measure not only specific physical or chemical properties (such as heat radiation, temperature, humidity, pressure, excess pressure, sound, luminance, magnetism, acceleration, force) but also the physical condition of its surroundings or register them as measured variables. Server Network station that provides services and resources for other stations, for example, a computer that manages data and passes this on to other computers as needed. Shutter speed: Shutter speed The shutter speed decides how long the CCD sensor of a camera is exposed. When more light is available, the operator can select a faster shutter speed and vice versa. At slow shutter speeds, there is greater risk that the image will suffer from "camera shake". SIMATIC S7 Siemens automation system with the controller families SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC S7400. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 413 Glossary Slave The device configured as slave in a communications system receives data from the device configured as master. The slave is always the passive partner. SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP is a simplified version of NTP. NTP is a standard for synchronizing clocks in computer systems via packet-based communications networks. SP1 Service Pack 1 -> Additional software for the Windows XP Professional operating system and Internet Explorer 6.0. SR SR stands for the resolution 640 x 480 or 768 x 480 regardless of other parameters. Statement list Statement List is a user program in which the control functions are listed in the form of statements. STEP 7 STEP 7 is the software package for configuring and programming SIMATIC automation systems. It is part of the SIMATIC industrial software. Sub-ROI The area in the main ROI with characteristics of the specimens of special relevance for image processing. Sub-ROIs are created when the characteristics of the main ROI are not adequate for evaluation. Switch: A switch is an electronic device for connecting several computers or network segments in a local network (LAN) - similar to a hub. A switch is also known as an intelligent hub. In its original form, the switch operates on layer 2 (Data Link layer) of the OSI model. The switch processes 48-bit MAC addresses and creates an SAT (Source Address Table). The switch has properties similar to a bridge and is also known as a multi-port bridge. Ethernet switch is the shortened form, of switching hub and indicates the ability to operate switched Ethernet. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 414 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Glossary Template The template contains the default settings. These are used to create a new program in just a few clicks of the mouse with Adjustment - "Save program". The settings made in the Adjustment - "Set image" task are saved in the template. The template is the basis for creating a new program in the "Programs" task. Trigger A trigger is a switch that activates an action when a specific event occurs. URL: Uniform Resource Locator An address uniquely identifying a location on the Internet. A URL for a WWW page is preceded by http://. A URL can contain other details such as the name of a hypertext page normally identified by the file name extension HTML or HTM. User interface Software: Web server application, in which most operator actions are performed on the PC screen using a mouse and keyboard. The software processes and displays models. Web API The Web API is a web interface that can be used to program a custom user interface. Parameter values of the reader, for example, can be read and written via Web API. SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 415 Glossary SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 416 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Index A Access protection, 26 ASM cable For SIMATIC MV420, 379 For SIMATIC MV440, 394 ASM cable length, 121 Automation License Manager ALM, 142 B Built-in ring light, 366 SIMATIC MV420, 377 SIMATIC MV440, 390 C Cable pin assignment MV400 push-pull power cable, 125 Power IO RS232 cable, 124 Cable sockets, 122 Cables Special lengths with cable outlet, 393 Calibration card SIMATIC MV440, 391 Calibration library, 62 Character font library Defining your own character fonts, 198 Using character fonts in OCR steps, 198 Climatic ambient conditions, 354 Climatic conditions Atmospheric pressure, 354 Temperature, 354 Configuration Avoiding interference, 119 via remote client, 26 Configuration table Finding the suitable lens, 381 Connecting cables, 129 Connecting safety extra-low voltage SELV, 120 Connecting the power supply, 121 Connection Reader, 119 Contact partner, 397 Contacts worldwide, 12 Control via an automation system, 163 Convention, 12 Courses, 398 D Device information, 217 Info, 217 Device replacement, 239 Diag. & monitoring, 209 Options, 209 Diagnostic information, 333 Diagnostics, 215 Error messages, 333 Information, 215 Read results, 333 Warnings/notes, 333 Diagnostics functions, 26 Digital out XMATCH, 316 DISA bit, 219 Disruptions, 119 Documentation package, 372 E Electromagnetic compatibility, 355 Environmental protection, 12 Error display, 222 Error message Calibrate, 340 Normalization, 339 ESD guidelines, 401 Ethernet cable M12/RJ-45, 393 Example Archiving diagnostic information on PC / PG, 330 Link with FB79, 330 Extras, 211 Options, 211 F Field of vision depending on camera distance SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 417 Index For a focal distance of 16 mm, 376 For a focal distance of 6 mm, 375 Filter error, 344 Finding the suitable lens Configuration table, 381 Firmware, 219 Full update, 219 Incremental update, 219 Fittings for mounting SIMATIC MV420, 374 SIMATIC MV440, 380 Function block FB79, 279 Further information, 12 Fuse, 354 G Guarantee, 14 Guidelines ESD guidelines, 401 H Handshaking, 277 History, 10 I I/O interface N type, 127 P type, 127 Image acquisition, 25 Image control, 179 Incorrect response due to interference signals, 119 Info Device information, 217 Statistics, 213 Information Device information, 213 Diagnostics, 215 Statistics, 213 Initialization With program selection, 247 Without program selection, 247 Installation SIMATIC MV420 reader, 117 Installation guidelines, 119 Integration PROFINET IO device, 234 Interfaces Communication, 171 Parameter, 171 J Job execution, 286 L LED ETHERNET, 333 POWER, 333 STATE/SF, 333 Lens Suitable, 381 License Text-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 391 Text-Genius Plus license (SIMATIC MV440), 391 Transferring, 144 Veri-Genius license (SIMATIC MV440), 391 Lighting, 207 Options, 207 Lighting unit, 364 M Maintenance, 351 MATCH command, 96 Module Electrostatic discharge, 14 Module sensitive to electrostatic discharge, 14 Mounting bracket SIMATIC MV420, 365 Mounting plate SIMATIC MV420, 365 SIMATIC MV440, 365 MV400 push-pull power cable Cable pin assignment, 125 O One-dimensional code, 27 Operating status Stop, 221 Optical Character Recognition, 75 Optical Character Recognition (OCR), 26 Optical Character Verification, 75 Options Diag. & monitoring, 209 Extras, 211 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 418 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Index Lighting, 207 Security, 208 P Parameter, 282 PoE switch SIMATIC MV440, 392 Power cable, 395 Power I/O cable, 395 Power IO RS232 cable Cable pin assignment, 124 Power IO RS-232 cable, 395 Power IO RS-232 cable, 395 Power IO RS-232 interface N type, 128 P type, 128 Power supply, Power supply unit for external lighting, 371 Processing mode, 204 Product CD-ROM, 372 Product information on the Internet, 12 PROFINET IO device Integration, 234 Program number, 211 Program sequence, 211 Programs Template, 177 Protective cap for lens screw connection, 361 Protective lens cover For built-in lamps (SIMATIC MV440), 388 For external lamps (SIMATIC MV440), 389 Installing the SIMATIC MV440 reader, 114 Protective lens housing, 366 Protective tube SIMATIC MV420, 376 Proxy Server, 354 Pseudocode example XML backup, 326 XML restore, 329 R Reader Connection, 119 control via an automation system, 163 Diagnostic information, 333 Key functions of the reader, 15 Reader lens SIMATIC MV420, 374 SIMATIC MV440, 380 Reader operating modes DHCP, 153 DHCP server, 153 Manual, 153 PROFINET mode, 153 Reading code, 25 Recycling, 12 Relative humidity, 354 Repair, 351 Ring light holder, 364 ROI moving with mouse or keyboard, 170 S Save program, 298 Saving programs, 299 Scanner portal, 26 Scanner portal application Restrictions, 318 Scope for devices, 9 for licenses, 9 Security, 208 Options, 208 Select program, 296 SELV Connecting safety extra-low voltage, 120 Server Proxy, 354 SIMATIC MV420 reader Degree of protection, 358 Starting current, 358 SIMATIC MV440 reader Degree of protection, 356 Starting current, 356 Socket ASM, 361 I/O, 361 Starting processing, 300 Statistics, 213 Info, 213 Stop, 221 System components, 23 System configuration, 99 System expansions, 14 System requirement PC/programming device, 24 Reader, 24 System requirements, 24 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 419 Index System setup PROFINET IO, 101 T Technical documentation On the Internet, 398 Technical Support, 397 Temperature, 354 Template key function, 177 Torx, 363 Track&Trace, 26 Training, 398 Transferring A license, 144 Two-dimensional code, 27 U User interface, 25 User management, 26 V Verification library Calibrate reader for code verification, 193 Define verification settings, 193 Versions Available versions, 15 W Worldwide Contacts, 12 X XMATCH Structure of the user data, 311 XMATCH command, 310 XMATCH user data Examples, 314 SIMATIC MV420 / SIMATIC MV440 420 Operating Instructions, 04/2013, A5E02371045-06 Get more information www.siemens.com/simatic-ident Siemens AG Industry Sector Sensors and Communication P.O. Box 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation Subject to change without prior notice A5E02371045-06 (c) Siemens AG 2009-2013 Industrielle Schalttechnik SIRIUS